LG | GW550 | Owner's Manual | LG GW550 Owner's manual

LG GW550 Owner's manual
ENGLISH
GW550 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
ELECTRONICS INC.
www.lgmobile.com
P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0)
GW550 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
ENGLISH
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
GW550 User Guide
www.lgmobile.com
P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0)
Bluetooth QD ID B015930
GW550 User Guide
This document is the user guide for the LG GW550 Windows Mobile Smartphone.
All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics.
Copying, modifying and distributing this document
without the consent of LG Electronics are prohibited.
Contents
Introduction ..............................6
GW550 Features .......................7
Phone Components ................................ 7
Keys and Parts Functions ....................... 8
Getting Started .......................10
Installing the SIM card and Battery ........10
Battery ................................................10
SIM Card.............................................11
Charging the Battery ............................12
microSD Card ......................................13
Turn the Device On and Off ....................15
Lock the Keyboard .................................15
Getting Started.......................................15
Adjust Volume ........................................15
Screen Information .................16
The Today Screen ..................................16
Status Indicators ....................................17
Shortcut Menu .......................................18
Start Menu.............................................19
Entering Information ...............23
Using the Keyboard ................................23
QWERTY Keyboard...............................23
XT9 Mode ..............................................24
Numeric Keypad ..................................24
Recording a Note ...................................24
Contacts .................................25
2
Contacts ................................................25
Outlook Contact ...................................25
SIM Contact ........................................25
To Create a Contact ...............................25
To Find a Contact ...................................25
To Work with the Contact List .................26
To Change Contact Information ..............26
To Delete a Contact ................................26
To Copy Contacts ...................................26
Smart Contacts ......................................26
Call .........................................27
Making a Voice Call................................27
Make a Call from Phone .......................27
Make a Call from Contacts ...................27
Make a Call from Call History ...............27
Speed Dial ..........................................27
Receiving a Call .....................................28
To Answer or Reject a Call ....................28
To End a Call .......................................28
In-call Options .......................................28
To Put a Call on Hold............................28
To Set Up a Conference Call .................28
To Turn the Speakerphone On or Off .....29
To Mute a Call .....................................29
Video Calls .............................................29
Make a Video Call ................................29
To End a Video Call ..............................30
Notes ..................................................30
Using Call History...................................30
Find Contact........................................30
Send Text Message ..............................30
Contents
E-mail .................................................30
View Timers ........................................30
Delete .................................................30
Delete List ...........................................31
Filter ...................................................31
Video Call............................................31
Messaging ..............................32
Messaging .............................................32
Text Message ........................................32
To create an SMS message ..................32
To create an MMS message .................33
To reply or forward a text message .......33
E-mail....................................................33
To Set up an E-mail Accont ..................34
To create and send a new e-mail ..........35
To reply or forward an e-mail................35
Receiving Messages ..............................36
Managing Messages ..............................36
My e-mail ..............................................37
Smart Email ...........................................37
Multimedia .............................38
Camera..................................................38
Taking a Photo.....................................38
Recording a Video................................38
Camera Settings ..................................39
Capture Mode Settings ........................40
Pictures & Videos ...................................41
To Copy a Picture or Video Clip to Your
Device ................................................41
To View Pictures ..................................41
To View Slide Show .............................. 42
To Play Videos with Audio .....................42
To Delete a Picture or Video Clip ...........42
To Edit a Picture ..................................42
To Set a Picture as the Today Screen
Background.........................................43
To Send Pictures and Video Clips via
E-mail or MMS ....................................44
To Assign Pictures to Contacts ..............44
To Save a Picture as Another File ..........44
To Use Advance Options .......................45
Windows Media .....................................45
Playback Screen ..................................46
Now Playing Screen .............................47
Library Screen .....................................47
FM Radio ...............................................48
To Use Radio Options ...........................49
Applications ............................50
Internet Explorer ....................................50
Windows Live™ ....................................51
To Set Up Windows Live™ ...................51
Using Hotmail ......................................51
Windows Live™ Contacts ....................52
Using Windows Live™ Search..............52
ActiveSync .............................................52
Setting up Windows Vista™ .................53
Setting up Windows XP ........................54
Synchronizing Information ....................55
Synchronizing via Bluetooth ..................57
3
Contents
Synchronizing Musics, Videos, and
Pictures ..............................................58
Internet Sharing .....................................59
Bluetooth Manager ................................59
To Set the Bluetooth Configuration ........59
To Make Your Device Discoverable ........60
Bluetooth Partnership ..........................60
To Accept a Bluetooth Partnership ........61
Services ..............................................61
Settings Page ......................................62
Accessories Page ................................62
My Devices Page .................................62
Office Mobile .........................................63
Excel Mobile ..........................................63
OneNote Mobile .....................................65
PowerPoint Mobile .................................65
Word Mobile ..........................................66
Adobe Reader LE ...................................68
To open a PDF file................................68
Task Manager ........................................68
MSN Money ...........................................68
MSN Weather.........................................68
GPS Accelerator .....................................69
AGPS Setting .........................................69
Java ......................................................69
Marketplace...........................................69
Microsoft My Phone ...............................70
To Configure My Phone ........................70
Remote Desktop ....................................70
RSS Viewer ............................................70
4
To Subscribe to RSS Feeds...................70
To Update RSS Feeds...........................71
To View RSS Feeds ..............................71
Live Search Widget ................................71
File Explorer...........................................71
Voice Notes............................................72
Calendar ................................................72
To Add an Event to your Calendar .........72
To Change your Default Calendar View ..73
Tasks .....................................................73
To Create a Task ..................................73
To Change the Priority of a Task ............73
To Set a Default reminder for all New
Tasks ..................................................73
To Show Start and Due Dates in the
Task List .............................................74
To Locate a Task ..................................74
Calculator ..............................................74
StopWatch .............................................74
Games ...................................................75
XT9 Dictionaries ....................................75
To add a word in XT9 ...........................75
To edit a word in XT9 ...........................75
To delete a word in XT9........................75
To add auto-substitution shortcut..........76
To edit auto-substitution shortcut ..........76
To delete auto-substitution shortcut ......76
XT9 Settings ..........................................76
Smart Applicatin ....................................76
Contents
Settings ..................................77
Phone ....................................................77
Auto Answer........................................77
Band Switch ........................................77
Call Barring .........................................77
Call Forwarding ...................................77
Call Options.........................................77
Call Waiting .........................................78
Caller ID ..............................................78
Channels.............................................78
Fixed Dialing .......................................78
Networks ............................................78
Pre-Defined Text Messages ..................78
Ringer Output ......................................78
Sounds ..................................................78
Profiles ..................................................79
Home Screen .........................................79
To Select Information Shown On Screen 79
To select color for your screen ..............80
To Add Own Background Image ............80
To Set Screen Timeout .........................80
Clock & Alarm ........................................81
Date and Time .....................................81
Alarm..................................................81
Connections...........................................81
Wireless Manager................................81
Wi-Fi ..................................................81
Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settingsi..82
To check WLAN statusi.........................82
Bluetooth ............................................83
Phone .................................................83
Security .................................................83
Device Lock ........................................83
To Protect your Phone with a PIN ..........84
To Change your Password ....................84
To Enter Owner Information ..................84
Remove Programs .................................84
Power Management ...............................84
Accessibility...........................................84
Regional Settings ...................................85
Setup E-mail .......................................85
Managed Programs .............................85
Accessories ............................86
Package Contents ..................................86
Guidelines for safe and
efficient use ............................88
Trouble shooting .....................94
5
Introduction
Congratulations on your purchase of this LG GW550 Windows Mobile Smartphone.
This user guide contains information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all
the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent damage or misuse of the
phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user guide could void
your warranty for this equipment.
6
GW550 Features
Phone Components
1. Phone button
12. Earpiece
2. Proximity Sensor
13. Camera
3. Display screen
4. Home key
14. Navigation key
15. Right soft key
16. End key
17. Back key
5. Left soft key
6. Call key
7. Enter key
18. Enter key
19. Smart E-mail key
20. Smart Contacts key
21. Smart Applications
key
8. Messaging key
9. Microphone
22. Camera
10. Speakers
23. Battery Compartment
SD
OPEN
micro
LOCK
11. microSD Card Holder
24. SIM Card Holder
7
GW550 Features
Keys and Parts Functions
1. Phone button
bLong press to turn the phone on or off.
bShort press to display Quick List. Quick
List allows you to turn off or lock the
keyboard of your device, provides shortcut
access to Task Manager or Wireless
Manager, or allows you to change profiles.
2. Proximity Sensor
3. Display screen
4. Home key: Press to return to the Today
screen.
5. Left soft key: Press to perform the
function indicated by the text on the
display above it.
6. Send key: Press to place or answer
incoming calls. In standby mode, press
to access the dialer and view the most
recent incoming, outgoing and missed
calls.
7. Enter key: Press to confirm a selection.
8. Messaging key: Press to access
Messaging.
9. Microphone
10. Speakers
11. microSD Card Holder
12. Earpiece
13. Camera: Use for video calls.
8
14. Navigation key: Use as directional keys
to move up, down, left, or right.
15. Right soft key: Press to perform the
function indicated by the text on the
display above it.
16. End key: Press to end or reject a call.
17. Back key: Press to go back to the
previous screen or back out of menus
one level at a time. When entering text,
press to delete single characters; press
and hold to delete entire words.
18. Enter key
19. Smart E-mail key: Press to access
Smart E-mail. Smart E-mail is a
shortcut application to send and receive
e-mails.
20. Smart Contacts key: Press to access
Smart Contacts. Smart Contacts allows
you to add your favorite contacts or
phone numbers to the Smart Contacts
list.
21. Smart Applications key: Press to
access Smart Applications. Smart
Application allows you to add your
favorite applications to the Smart
Applications list for easy access.
22. Camera: Use to take photos or videos.
23. Battery Compartment
24. SIM Card Holder
GW550 Features
Volume Keys
bWhen the screen
is idle, press to adjust
system volume.
bDuring a call, press to
adjust the in-call volume.
USB Connector
Use to connect the
charger, earphone, or USB
cable to synchronize with
a computer.
Camera Key
Press to activate the
camera and take photos
or videos.
How to hold your phone
In order to allow better RF antenna sensitivity, LG suggests that you hold
the handset as depicted in the figure below.
Please do not cover the RF antenna area with your hand during a call and
using a bluetooth connection. It may degrade speech quality.
9
Getting Started
Installing the SIM card and
Battery
Always turn off your phone and disconnect
it from the charger and other accessories
before installing or replacing the SIM card,
microSD card, and battery.
To remove the back cover
1. Place three fingers on the back cover and
your thumb on the front panel.
2. Push the front panel with your thumb and
slide the back cover off with the three
fingers.
Battery
Your phone comes with a rechargeable Li-ion
battery.
To remove the battery
1. Turn the phone off.
2. Remove the back cover.
3. Insert your finger in the battery’s finger
grip, then gently push down the battery
towards the direction of the arrow to
release and remove the battery.
B
A
10
Getting Started
SIM Card
Your SIM card contains your phone number,
subscription details, and contacts and must
be inserted into your handset.
To install the SIM card
Insert the SIM card with the metal contacts
facing down and the cut-off corner on the
top-right side.
To remove the SIM card
Note
The SIM card and its contacts can be
easily damaged by scratching and bending
the card. Be careful when installing and
removing the card. Refer to the instructions
supplied with the SIM card.
To install the battery
1. Remove the back cover.
2. Insert the battery. Align the contacts of the
battery with the corresponding connectors
on the battery compartment and insert in
the direction of the arrow (A) then push
the battery into place (B).
3. Replace the back cover.
A
B
1. Remove the battery if it is installed.
2. Slide the SIM card out the slot.
11
Getting Started
To replace the back cover
1. Align the back cover (A).
2. Push the back cover to lock into place (B).
B
A
Charging the Battery
1. Make sure the battery is installed inside
the battery compartment.
2. Plug the power adaptor into a wall outlet.
3. Flip open the USB connector’s cover of
the phone.
4. Connect the power adaptor into the USB
connector of your phone.
12
Battery Indicators
When the phone is turned on...
icon indicates that the battery
bThe
is charging.
bWhen the battery is fully charged, the
icon is displayed.
When the phone is turned off...
bA charging animation is displayed on the
screen.
bWhen the battery is fully charged, the
animation stops and the screen turns
blank.
Note
When you charge a fully discharged battery,
it may take over a minute for the display
to respond. It is not a malfunction but
completely normal.
Getting Started
CAUTION!
bDo not remove the battery or the SIM
card while charging.
bThere is a risk of explosion if battery
is replaced by an incorrect type.
Replace only with batteries approved
by the manufacturer.
bDispose of used batteries according
to the local regulations in your area.
bDo not force the mini USB connector
as this may damage the phone or
the cable.
microSD Card
For additional storage space for your photos,
videos, music and files, install a microSD
card into your phone.
To install the microSD card
1. Push the microSD card slot towards the
direction of the arrow (A) to release lock,
then flip up the slot (B).
2. Slide the microSD card into the slot with
the gold contact area facing up (C).
3. Flip down (D) then push the slot towards
the direction of the arrow (E) to lock.
WARNING!
• Unplug the charger from the mains and
phone during lightning storms to avoid
electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that no sharp-edged items,
such as nails, come into contact with the
battery. There is a risk of causing fire.
13
Getting Started
B
A
To remove the microSD card
1. Turn the phone off.
2. Push the microSD card slot to release
lock.
3. Flip up the slot.
4. Slide out the microSD card from the slot.
5. Flip down then push the slot to lock.
Info!
C
D
OP
LO
OP
LO
14
CK
EN
CK
EN
E
The microSD card is an optional
accessory and is not included in your
package. Contact your retailer to
purchase one.
bAvoid using the microSD card when the
battery is low.
bThe card is designed to fit easily into
the slot.
bDo not bend the card or force it into
the slot.
bDo not insert any memory cards other
than microSD.
Getting Started
Turn the Device On and Off
Adjust Volume
To turn on the device, press and hold the
Power button located on top of the device.
To turn off the device:
• Press the Power button and select
Power off.
• Press and hold the Power button.
Your device has two types of volume:
bSystem Volume: Adjust the system
volume to change the volume level of
system sounds and notifications like
alarm, ringer, keypad, audio and video
playback.
Lock the Keyboard
To lock the keyboard, press and hold the
End key.
To unlock keyboard, select Unlock, then
press *.
Getting Started
Getting Started gives you step-by-step
instructions on how to set up the basic
functions of your device. From the Today
screen, do either of the following to access
Getting Started:
bScroll down to select the Getting Started
shortcut menu, then scroll left or right and
select a specific topic.
bSelect Start > All Programs > Getting
Started, then select the topic to view.
To adjust the system volume:
• When the device is in idle mode, press
the volume keys up or down to increase
or decrease volume.
bIn-Call Volume: Adjusts the volume level
of the phone conversation.
To adjust the in-call volume:
• During a call, press the volume keys
up or down to increase or decrease
volume.
15
Screen Information
The Today Screen
From the home screen, you can quickly check your schedule, and see at a glance any missed
calls or new messages.
Default Today Screen
Status Indicators
Service Provider’s Name
Date and Time
Wi-Fi Status
Shortcut menu
Scroll down to view more
shortcut menu. Highlight
a menu to expand to more
shortcuts.
Contacts
Start menu
(Left soft key function) (Right soft key function)
bPress the left soft key bPress the right soft key
to access menu. to access Contacts.
To Customize the Today Screen
You can change the layout, background image, color scheme and the time out of the Today
screen.
bTo customize settings of the Today screen, go to Start > Settings > Home Screen.
16
Screen Information
Status Indicators
The following are some of the status icons
that you may see on your device.
Icon
GPRS network in use
HSDPA network in use
Description
Indicates maximum signal
strength
New message received
Missed call or rejected call
Searching for signal
No phone service
Call in progress
Indicates battery level
Call on hold
Battery low
Bluetooth active
Battery charging
Wireless network available
Silent mode enabled
Wireless network connecting
Vibrate mode enabled
Wireless network connected
WCDMA (3G) available
HSDPA available
GPRS (General Packet Radio
Services) available
3G network in use
17
Screen Information
Shortcut Menu
The shortcut menu displays notifications or other information of each menu item.
By default the following applications are displayed:
Menu
Description
Calls and Messages
Notification
Displays notifications about recent voice and video calls,
voicemail, and other messages. To access a submenu, use the
navigation keys to scroll, then press the Enter key.
Appointments
Displays upcoming schedules and allows you to set appointments.
Getting Started
Select an item to view its help information.
Favorites
Displays and allows you to add your favorite web pages for easy
access.
Settings
Displays and allows you to easily adjust basic device settings.
bTo access a shortcut menu, use the navigation keys, then press the Enter key.
bTo add shortcuts of media applications, go to Start > Settings > Home Screen> Home
Screen Layout > Sliding Panel Media.
18
Screen Information
Start Menu
The Start menu contains all the programs
installed on your device.
bTo access a menu, use the
navigation keys to highlight the
item, then press the Enter key.
Accessing the Start menu
bFrom the Home screen, press the left soft
key Start to access the Start menu.
bBy default, the Recent Programs screen is
displayed. To view other programs, press
the left soft key All Programs.
bTo go to the next screen display, press the
left soft key More.
bTo go back to the previous screen, press
the Back key
.
Programs
The following programs are installed on your device.
Icon
Program
Description
Office Mobile
Excel Mobile
View and edit Excel workbooks.
Word Mobile
View and edit Word documents.
PowerPoint
Mobile
View slide shows.
OneNote Mobile
Create notes with pictures and recordings.
19
Screen Information
Icon
20
Program
Description
Messaging
Send and receive e-mail and text messages.
Calendar
Schedule appointments and set alarm notifications.
Contacts
Lets you store names, phone numbers, e-mail and other
information.
Internet Explorer
Browse the web and download files from the Internet.
Tasks
Keeps track of your tasks.
ActiveSync
Synchronizes information between your device and a
computer.
Call History
Displays the list of missed, received or placed calls.
Games
Play pre-installed games on your device: Bubble Breaker and
Solitaire.
Voice Notes
Record voice notes.
Pictures & Videos
Collects, organizes, and sorts photo files in the My Picture
folder of your device or the storage card.
Getting Started
Learn the basics on how to operate your device.
Internet Sharing
Use your device as an Internet sharing device.
File Explorer
Browse files and folders saved on your device or the storage
card.
Marketplace
Purchase and download applications on the web.
Screen Information
Icon
Program
Description
Microsoft My
Phone
Synchronizes information on your device with your My Phone
account at http://myphone.microsoft.com.
Adobe Reader LE
View *.pdf files on your device.
AGPS Settings
Enable Assisted Global Positioning System.
Brightness
Control the level of brightness when using the battery or
external power.
Bluetooth
Connect with other Bluetooth devices and create a network.
Camera
Capture photos and record videos.
FM Radio
Connect the earphones and tune in to the FM radio.
GPS Accelerator
Download GPS data.
Java
Install Java applications on your device.
Remote Desktop
Set up and connect to your computer to access files and
programs from your device.
Windows Media
Mobile version of Windows Media Player. Tune in and watch
your favorite music videos.
RSS Viewer
View RSS or RDF-compatible newsfeeds.
Stopwatch
Functions as a timer.
Windows Live
Mobile version of Windows Live™.
21
Screen Information
Icon
22
Program
Description
Clock & Alarm
Allows you to set the date and time and set alarms.
MSN Money
Access MSN Money to view stocks.
MSN Weather
View the weather forecast via MSN Weather.
Search Widget
Provides access to Live Search.
Speed Dial
Allows you to add phone numbers for speed dial.
XT9 Dictionaries
Allows you to set the language of the dictionary and enable
functions such as word completion, next word prediction and
others.
Entering Information
Using the Keyboard
QWERTY Keyboard
bTo enter a single symbol or number
printed at the top of keys, press Fn then
press the corresponding key.
To enter various symbols or numbers,
press and hold Fn then press the
corresponding keys.
To switch back to text mode, press Fn
again. To enter the symbols that are not
shown on the keypad, press then
select the desired symbol.
bPress
to go to the next line.
bPress to erase a character.
Sym
Numeric Keypad
DEL
Your device comes with a full keyboard
for text entry and other shortcut button
functions.
The following icons are displayed on the
status indicator area:
Icon
QWERTY Keyboard
QWERTY keyboard is activated whenever
an alphanumeric text entry is required. This
functions just like a standard computer
keyboard.
bTo switch between the different letter
cases, press .
To type all in upper case letters, press
and hold
then press the corresponding
keys. To switch back to lower case entry,
press again.
CAPS
Description
Enter text in lower case letter
Enter one character in upper
case and the rest in lower case
Enter all text in upper case letter
Enter a number or symbol
Enter all numbers or symbols
CAPS
CAPS
23
Entering Information
XT9 Mode
Numeric Keypad
XT9 predicts words and suggests spellings
as you type the first few characters, so you
can just select the word you want.
To activate XT9 mode, press Fn + spacebar
and select XT9 English.
To enter text using XT9
1. Type the first few characters of the word.
2. As you type, the dictionary displays
predicted words below the word you are
typing.
3. Scroll left or right to highlight the word
then press the Enter key to select.
The numeric keypad functions just like a
standard phone keypad. It is automatically
activated whenever numeric entries are
required, such as in setting the time.
The following icons are displayed on the
status indicator area:
Icon
Description
Enter the first character in
upper case and the rest in
lower case
Enter text in lower case letter
24
Recording a Note
You can create a stand-alone recording
(voice note) or you can add a recording to
a note.
To create a voice note
1. Select Start > Voice Notes.
2. Hold your device’s microphone near your
mouth or other sound sources.
3. Select Record to start recording.
4. Select Stop to stop recording.
To add a recording to a note
1. Select Start > Office Mobile > OneNote
Mobile.
2. Create or open a note.
3. Select Menu > Insert Recording.
4. Hold your device’s microphone near your
mouth or other sound sources.
5. Select Record to start recording.
6. Select Stop to stop recording.
Contacts
Contacts
Contacts is your address book and
information storage for the people you
communicate with. You can store phone
numbers, e-mail addresses, home
addresses, and other information that relates
to a contact. You can also add a picture or
assign a ringtone to a contact.
Your device supports two types of contacts:
Outlook and SIM Contacts.
Outlook Contact
Contacts are stored in the device memory.
If you use Outlook on your PC, you can
synchronize contacts between your device
and the PC.
SIM Contact
Contacts are stored in the SIM card memory.
You can only store a name and a phone
number per entry.
To Create a Contact
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. Select New.
3. Select Outlook Contact or SIM Contact,
then enter the contact details.
4. When finished, select Done.
TIP!
bYou can create a contact from Call
History list, select Menu > Save to
Contacts.
bTo add the sender of a message
to Contacts, select the received
message and the number, then press
the Enter key.
To Find a Contact
There are several ways to find a contact
when your contact list is long.
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. If you are not in Name view, tap Menu >
View By > Name.
3. Do one of the following:
bEnter the first character of a name. Scroll
down to select the desired name from
the the list. The next character you enter
continues to narrow the search.
bFilter the list by category. In the contact
list, select Menu > Filter. Then, select
a category you’ve assigned to a contact.
To show all contacts again, select No
Categories.
25
Contacts
To Work with the Contact List
To Delete a Contact
There are several ways to use and
synchronise the contact list. Here are a
few tips:
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. In the contact list, do any of the following:
bIn Name view, you can search for a
contact by entering a name or by using
the alphabetical index. To switch to Name
view, select Menu > View By > Name.
bTo see a summary of information about
a contact, select the contact. From there
you can also make a call or send a
message.
bTo see a list of contacts employed by
a specific company, select Menu >
View By > Company. Then, select the
company name.
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. Select the contact.
3. Select Menu > Delete.
4. Select Yes to confirm delete.
To Change Contact Information
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. Select the contact.
3. Select Menu > Edit and enter the
changes.
4. When finished, select Done.
26
To Copy Contacts
To copy saved Contacts from SIM card to
your device or from your device to SIM card:
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. Select Menu > Select Contacts >
Several or All.
3. Select Menu > Copy Contacts > To
Contacts or To SIM.
Smart Contacts
You can register the contact you frequently
use in Smart Contacts. Using the registered
contact, you can easily make a call or send
a message.
Call
Making a Voice Call
Calling is easy with the smart dial feature.
If you press a number on the keypad, the
screen displays the phone numbers in your
Call History, starting with the number you
enter.
You can then select the number you want
to call.
Make a Call from Phone
To make a call, enter the phone number you
wish to call, including the area code, and
press the Call key
.
For international calls, press and hold “0”
to add the + character that replaces the
international access code.
To end the call, press the End key
.
Note
If you enter the wrong number, press
to delete a number. To delete all
the numbers, press and hold
.
Make a Call from Contacts
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Press the Call key
to place the call.
Make a Call from Call History
1. From the Today screen, press the Call key
to view your call history.
2. Select the desired number or name from
the list.
3. Press the Call key
to place the call.
Speed Dial
Use speed dial to call a number by pressing
and holding a number key when in the home
screen. Before you can create a speed dial
entry, the number must already exists in
Contacts list.
27
Call
To Create a Speed Dial Entry
Receiving a Call
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts.
2. Highlight the contact, then press the
Enter key.
3. Select Menu > Add to Speed Dial.
4. In the Keypad Assignment box, select the
desired number.
5. Select Done to save.
When you receive an incoming call, a
message will appear and the device will ring
if the ring volume is turned on.
Note
bKey 1 is generally assigned to your
voice mail, and Speed Dial will
designate the next available key
by default. If you want to save a
number to a key that has already
been assigned, the new number will
replace the current one.
bTo delete a Speed Dial entry, in the
Speed Dial list, select the desired
entry then select Menu > Delete.
To Answer or Reject a Call
bTo answer the call, select Answer or
.
press the Call key
bTo reject the call, press the End key
.
bTo reject the call and send a text
message, select Menu > Respond with
text message.
To End a Call
bTo end an incoming or outgoing call, press
the End key
.
In-call Options
To Put a Call on Hold
bSelect Menu > Hold.
bTo unhold a call, select Menu > Unhold.
To Set Up a Conference Call
1. Either put the current call on hold, and dial
a second number; or accept an incoming
call when you are already having a call
conversation.
2. Select Menu > Conference.
28
Call
Note
Not all service providers support
conference call. Contact your service
provider for details.
To Turn the Speakerphone On or Off
The speakerphone allows users to talk
hands-free or allows other people to listen to
the conversation.
bDuring a conversation, select Menu >
Speakerphone On. The speakerphone
icon
appear on the status indicators
area.
bTo turn off the speakerphone, select Menu
> Speakerphone Off.
bDuring a conversation, select Menu
> Mute. The microphone off
icon
appears on the screen.
bTo turn on the microphone, select
Unmute.
Video Calls
You can see a real-time, two-way video
between you and the caller who has a
compatible mobile phone.
Note
A 3G network coverage is required
to enabled Video Call functions. You
can send or start to receive video
from a caller whose phone has Video
Call capabilities. Contact your service
provider for details.
WARNING!
To avoid damage to your ear, do
not hold out your device when the
speakerphone is turned Off.
To Mute a Call
You can turn off the microphone during a
call. When the phone is muted, you can hear
the caller but the caller cannot hear you
Make a Video Call
To Make a Video Call From Phone
1. Enter the phone number or select the
name from Contacts or Call History.
2. Select Menu > Make VT Call or Menu >
Video Call from Contacts to place the call.
29
Call
To End a Video Call
bTo end an incoming or outgoing video call,
.
press the End key
Notes
1. Video call service is only available in 3G
coverage areas.
2. The video call will be terminated in the
following cases:
When you accept a 3rd party, Conference
Call, or a 2nd incoming call.
When the voice call is placed on hold.
When the voice call is disconnected.
When moving out of a 3G service area.
When the network connection is in poor
state.
Using Call History
From the Today screen, do either of the
following to open the Call History screen:
bHighlight Calls and Messages Notification
shortcut, then select View.
bSelect Start > Call History.
You can view the recently missed, received,
and dialed calls.
You can make a call, send a text or
multimedia message, and save a number
to Contacts.
30
You can delete a selected number or select
and delete all at one time.
Find Contact
If the number is saved in your Contacts, you
can view the contact details by selecting
Menu > Find Contact.
Send Text Message
1. Select the number you want from the list.
2. Select Menu > Send Text Message to
send a text message.
E-mail
If the selected number has an e-mail
address saved in your Contacts, you can
send an email by selecting Menu > E-mail.
View Timers
To view the approximate duration of all calls
made on your device, select Menu > View
Timers.
bTo reset timer, select Menu > Reset
Timers.
Delete
1. Select the desired number.
2. Select Menu > Delete.
3. Select Yes to confirm.
Call
Delete List
To empty the call history list, select Menu >
Delete List.
Filter
bNo Filter: Allows you to view missed,
received, and dialed call records.
bMissed Calls: Allows you to view the
calls which you have not answered.
bIncoming Calls: Allows you to view the
calls that you have answered.
bOutgoing Calls: Allows you to view the
calls that you have dialed.
Video Call
1. Select the number to make a video call
from the list.
2. Select Menu > Video Call.
31
Messaging
Messaging
To Open the Messaging screen
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Messaging.
You can send and receive text messages,
multimedia messages, audio messages, and
email messagse.
To create an SMS message
1. From the Messaging screen, select Text
Message.
2. Select Menu > New > SMS.
3. On the To field, enter the recipient’s
phone number or add a recipient from
Contacts.
TIP!
Text Message
You can write, edit, and view the text
messages.
bTo add a recipient from Contacts,
select Menu > Add Recipient. Then
select the name.
bRepeat the same procedure to add
more recipients.
4. Compose your message.
TIP!
bTo use a template, select Menu >
My Text, the text and Insert.
5. When finished, select Send.
32
Messaging
To create an MMS message
To reply or forward a text message
1. From the Messaging screen, select Text
Message.
2. Select Menu > New > MMS.
3. On the To field, enter the recipient’s
phone number.
4. Enter the Subject for the message.
5. Select Insert Text to enter the text of the
message, and select Insert Picture/
Video or Insert Audio to add media
objects. To capture a new image or record
a new sound clip for the message, select
Menu > Capture.
6. To preview a multimedia message before
sending it, select Menu > Preview
Message.
7. When finished, select Send.
Highlight the message then select Reply or
Menu > Reply/Forward > Reply, Reply all
or Forward.
E-mail
You can send and receive Outlook and
Internet e-mail trhough an Internet Service
Provider (ISP). You can access e-mail from
work using VPN connection.
Your device can send and receive e-mails
just as you do with a PC. You can set up the
following e-mail accounts:
Outlook E-mail
This e-mail account can be synchronized
with your computer through Microsoft
Outlook® or Exchange Server®.
Internet E-mail
This is an e-mail account provided by an
Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a web-based
e-mail such as Hotmail, Yahoo!Mail, etc.
33
Messaging
To Set up an E-mail Accont
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Messaging.
2. Select Setup E-mail.
3. Enter your E-mail address and Password
then select Next.
Note
Select the Save Password box to allow
the phone to remember your password
so you do not have to enter it again.
4. Auto setup attempts to download
necessary e-mail server settings so that
you do not have to set them manually.
Once finished, select Next.
5. Enter Your Name (name to display when
you send e-mail), Account display name
(name for this account on your device),
then select Next.
34
Note
bAuto setup is successful, the
Account display name and the
address of the incoming and outgoing
e-mail servers are populated.
bAuto setup is unsuccessful or you
have an account that you access
using VPN server connection, contact
your ISP or network administrator for
the required information.
6. Select Automatic Send/Receive option.
7. Select Finish to complete setup.
Messaging
To create and send a new e-mail
1. From the Messaging screen, select the
e-mail account.
2. Select Menu > New.
3. On To, enter the recipient’s e-mail
address.
TIP!
bTo add Bcc and Cc recipients, use
the navigation key up to view and
scroll the screen’s the top page.
4. Enter the Subject.
5. Compose your message.
6. When finished, select Send.
Note
bYou will be alerted when you have
received messages.
bReceived messages are stored in
the Inbox.
bIf the device shows “No space for SIM
message”, delete some messages
from the Inbox.
bIf the device shows “No space for
messages”, make space of each
repository by deleting messages,
media, and applications.
To reply or forward an e-mail
1. Highlight the message then select Menu
> Reply/Forward > Reply, Reply all or
Forward.
2. Compose your response.
bTo quickly add common messages, select
Menu > My Text and select a desired
message.
bTo add an attachment, select Menu >
Insert > Picture, Voice Note or File.
3. When finished, select Send.
35
Messaging
Receiving Messages
The manner in which you receive messages
depends on the type of the account you
have:
• To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook
E-mail account, begin synchronization with
Exchange Server through ActiveSync.
• To send and receive an Internet e-mail
account, download messages through a
remote e-mail server.
• Text messages are automatically received
when your phone is turned on. When your
phone is off, your service provider holds
the messages until the next time your
phone is turned on.
Managing Messages
On the Messaging screen, select the
message account to open. By default, when
you open the account, its Inbox is displayed.
To view and manage account folders, select
Menu > Folders.
bDeleted Items: View deleted items.
bDrafts: View saved messages. Select a
message to edit message.
bInbox: View received messages. Select a
message to view message.
36
TIP!
Windows Mobile 6.5 Standard manages
your Inbox messages by address. You
can check the conversation history with
the address that you sent a message
to or view the message by selecting
the threaded message. Create a
new message on the text message
composer which is on the bottom of the
conversation history screen. You can
send the new message by selecting
Send.
bOutbox: The outbox is a temporary
storage for messages waiting to be sent.
Failed messages are also placed in the
Outbox.
bSent Items: View the messages you sent.
Messaging
My e-mail
My e-mail connects you to your online world
while on the go with your phone.
Once you choose “Setup Now”, My
e-mail will prompt you for your username
and password to your favorite Internet
destinations. You have the option to choose
one or more sites either now or in the future,
and My e-mail will automatically deliver new
information form those sites to your phone.
Smart Email
You can add the email address you
frequently use in Smart Email.
Using this menu,you can easily view the
email which is delivered from registerd Email
address.
37
Multimedia
Camera
Taking a Photo
1. Select Start > Camera or press the
Camera key to activate the camera
capture mode.
Zoom
White Balance
Photo Mode
Remaining shots
Memory
Resolution
bTo send the image via MMS or e-mail,
select Menu > Send.
bTo delete the image, select Menu >
Delete.
3. The captured image is automatically
saved in the My Pictures folder. To
view images in the folder, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
4. To close the camera, select Menu > Exit.
Recording a Video
1. Select Start > Camera or press the
Camera key to activate the camera
capture mode.
2. Select Options > Video.
3. Press the Enter key or the Camera key
to start recording; press again to stop
recording.
2. Press the Enter key or the Camera key to
capture an image.
3. The captured image is displayed on the
screen. Do either of the following:
bTo capture more images, select Back.
bTo view the images in the folder, select
Menu > View.
38
Multimedia
4. Do either of the following:
bTo capture more images, select Back.
bTo play the video, select Menu > Play.
bTo send the video via MMS, select Menu
> Send.
bTo delete the video, select Menu >
Delete.
3. The recorded video is automatically saved
in the My Videos folder. To play videos in
the folder, select Start > File Explorer >
My Videos, then select the desired video
file to play. Videos are played using the
Windows Media Player application.
4. To close the camera, select Menu > Exit.
Camera Settings
Before taking a photo or recording video, you
can change the camera settings by selecting
Menu > Settings. Available settings are
as follows:
bTimer: Allows you to select the delay time
(5 sec., 10 sec.)
bBurst: Set the number of shots to take
when burst mode is enabled. (3 pics,
5 pics)
bStorage: Select the memory to save your
pictures and videos.
bShutter Sound: Enable or disable shutter
sound when the Camera or Enter key is
pressd.
bVideo Format: Allows you to select the
video file format.
bVideo Voice: Enable or disable audio
during video recording.
bFlicker: Allows you to select flicker
setting. (50Hz, 60Hz)
bTime Stamp: Enable or disable time
stamp on captured images.
bPhoto Quality: Allows you to select the
photo quality. (Normal, Fine, Super Fine)
bPanorama: Allows you to select the
panoramic view. (Horzontal, Vertical)
39
Multimedia
Capture Mode Settings
On the capture screen, select Options to
view and adjust capture mode settings.
Choosing Capture Mode Type
Use the navigation up and down keys then
Enter key to select a capture mode type:
bPhoto: Select to capture still images. This
is the default capture mode.
bTimer: Select to enable timer mode.
bBurst: Select to capture three or five
continuous shots.
bFrame: Select to choose from the
predefined frames and add it to your
images.
bPMK: Select to capture image in vivid
colors.
bSmile: When capturing an image in this
mode, the focus is set on the smiling
subject.
bVideo: Select to record a standard video.
bMMS Video: Select to capture video
suitable to send via MMS.
40
Use the navigation left and right keys then
Enter to adjust other capture settings such
as:
bBrightness: Adjusts brightness.
bWhite Balance: Auto / Incandescent /
Fluorescent / Daylight / Cloudy
bEffect: Normal / Black & White / Negative
/ Sepia
bResolution: Available options depend on
the selected capture mode type.
Multimedia
Pictures & Videos
The Pictures & Videos application collects,
organizes, and sorts images and video clips
on your device or the storage card.
You can view the pictures as a slide show,
beam or send them via e-mail, edit them, or
set them as the background on the Today
screen.
To Copy a Picture or Video Clip to Your
Device
You can copy pictures from your PC and view
them on your device.
bCopy the pictures from your PC or a
storage card to the My Pictures folder on
your device.
Note
bYou can also copy pictures to your
PC from your device using a memory
card. Insert the memory card into
the memory card slot on your device,
then copy the pictures from your
device to the folder you created on
the memory card.
To View Pictures
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos. The images in the
My Pictures folder appear as thumbnails
by default.
TIP!
bIf you are not in the My Pictures
folder, select Menu > Folders > My
Pictures.
bTo go to other folders, select Menu
> Folders > My Device, then select
your desired folder.
2. Highlight a picture and select View.
3. To zoom the image, select Menu > Zoom,
then select zoom options (Zoom In / Zoom
Out / Fit to Screen / Actual Size).
41
Multimedia
To View Slide Show
To Delete a Picture or Video Clip
bFrom the My Pictures folder screen or
while viewing a picture, select Menu >
Play Slide Show.
bTo stop slide show, press the back key
.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight a picture or video clip then
select Menu > Delete.
3. Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
To Play Videos with Audio
To Edit a Picture
1. Select Menu > Folders > My Device >
My Documents > My Videos to open
the default folder for videos. By default,
the video files appear as thumbnails with
a media icon.
You can rotate, crop, and adjust the
brightness and color contrast of your
pictures.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the picture you want to edit.
3. Select Menu > Edit. The Edit screen
appears.
4. Select Menu, then any of the following:
bRotate: To rotate the picture 90º
clockwise.
bCrop: To crop the picture. Use the
navigation and Enter keys to select the
position of the first and second corners.
Select Done to complete cropping.
2. Highlight the video and select Play to play
it with the built-in Windows Media Player.
42
Multimedia
To Set a Picture as the Today Screen
Background
bAuto Correct: To adjust the brightness
and contrast levels of the picture.
Note
bTo undo an edit, select Menu >
Undo.
bTo cancel all unsaved edits you made
to the picture, press
then select
Yes to confirm.
You can use a picture as the background on
the Today screen.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the picture you want to set as
background.
3. Select Menu > Use as Home Screen.
4. Adjust the transparency level, select a
higher percentage for a more transparent
picture, or a lower percentage for a more
opaque picture.
5. Select Finish to complete.
5. When finished, select Done.
43
Multimedia
To Send Pictures and Video Clips via
E-mail or MMS
You can send pictures and video clips to
other devices via e-mail.
1. First, set up Messaging to send and
receive e-mail messages.
2. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
3. Highlight the picture or video clip you
want to send.
4. Select Menu > Send, then select the
messaging account (such as Outlook
E-mail or MMS) to send the attached item.
5. A new message is created with the item
attached.
6. Enter the recipient name and subject, then
select Send. The message will be sent the
next time you synchronize your device.
Note
bPictures and video clips are saved
automatically before they are sent.
44
To Assign Pictures to Contacts
You can assign a picture to a contact so that
you can easily identify the contact at any
point of time.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
2. Highlight a picture then select Menu >
Save to Contact.
3. Select the desired contact from the
Contacts list then Select to confirm.
To Save a Picture as Another File
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the picture you want to save as
another file.
3. Select Menu > Save > Save As.
4. Enter the new filename, then select Done.
Multimedia
To Use Advance Options
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Pictures & Videos.
2. Select the picture for which you want to
configure settings.
3. Select Menu > Options. The Options
screen appears, allow you to:
bResize a picture so that you can send it
faster via e-mail.
bConfigure the rotation setting.
bConfigure the view settings during slide
shows.
Windows Media
Use Microsoft Windows Media Player 10
Mobile for Pocket PC to play digital audio
and video files that are stored on your device
or on a network, such as on a web site. The
following file formats are supported by this
application: WAV, WMA, WMV, MP3, MIDI,
SP-MIDI, SMAF, AAC, AMR, 3GP, MP4, etc.
To Open Windows Media
Access Windows Media by any of the
following options:
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Windows Media to open the application.
bOpen an audio or video file from File
Explorer or Pictures & Videos.
Windows Media Player has three primary
screens: Playback, Now Playing and Library.
From the Playback screen, select Now
Playing or Menu > Library to switch to Now
Playing or Library screen.
45
Multimedia
Playback Screen
This is the default screen that displays the
playback controls, the album art window,
and the video window. You can change the
appearance of this screen by choosing a
different skin.
When you are viewing the Playback screen,
the following commands appear on the
Menu.
bOptions: Lets you adjust various Windows
Media Player options, including network,
skin, and hardware button options.
bProperties: Displays information about
the currently playing file.
bAbout: Displays information about the
Windows Media Player, such as the
version number.
Playback Controls
bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so
you can choose a file to play.
bPlay/Pause: Starts or pauses playback.
bStop: Stops playback.
bShuffle/Repeat: Plays the items in the
Now Playing playlist randomly/repeatedly.
bFull Screen: When a video is playing,
displays it by using the entire screen.
46
During playback, use the following keys to
play, pause, skip titles/tracks, and adjust
the volume.
bTo start or pause playback, press the
Enter key.
bTo go to the previous title/track, press the
left navigation key.
bTo go to the next title/track, press the right
navigation key.
bTo increase or decrease the volume, press
the up or down navigation keys.
Multimedia
Now Playing Screen
Library Screen
The screen that displays the Now Playing
playlist. This special playlist indicates the
currently playing file and any files that are
“queued up” to play next.
When you are viewing the Now Playing
screen, the following commands appear on
the Menu.
The Library screen lets you quickly find
your audio files, video files, and playlists. It
contains categories such as My Music, My
Videos, My TV, My Playlists and Now Playing.
bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so
you can choose a file to play.
bMove Up/ Down: Moves the selected
item up/down in the playlist order.
bRemove from Playlist: Deletes the
selected item from the playlist.
bShuffle/Repeat: Plays the items in the
Now Playing playlist randomly/repeatedly.
bSave Playlist: Saves the current playlist.
bClear Now Playing: Deletes all items
from the Now Playing playlist.
bError Details: Displays error information
about the selected item (an exclamation
mark appears before the item name if
error details are available).
bProperties: Displays information about
the selected file.
47
Multimedia
When you are viewing the Library screen, the
following commands appear on the Menu.
bQueue Up: Adds the selected item to the
end of the current Now Playing playlist.
bDelete from Library: Deletes the selected
item from the library.
bNow Playing: Displays the Now Playing
screen.
bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so
you can choose a file to play.
bUpdate Library: Adds new items to
the library by searching your device or
storage card.
bOpen File: Lets you find and play files
that are stored on your device or storage
card but that are not in the library.
bOpen URL: Lets you play a file on a
network, such as the Internet.
bProperties: Displays information about
the selected file.
bPlayer: Open the Window media player.
48
FM Radio
You can search for your favorite radio
stations and enjoy listening to the radio.
Note
bYou must connect the supplied
earphones or use Bluetooth
headsets to use the FM Radio.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
FM Radio.
2. Press the navigation left and right keys to
select the radio station to listen to.
TIP!
Press and hold the navigation left and
right keys to find stations.
Multimedia
3. Select Channel to tune in to a preset
station. When no preset channel is
available, execute Auto Scan.
4. To close radio, select Menu > Exit.
To Use Radio Options
From the FM Radio screen, select Menu and
choose any of the following options:
bListen Via: Allows you to select to listen
to the radio via Wired HeadSet, Speaker.
bEdit: Allows you to edit the station set on
a channel.
bAdd New: Allows you to add a new
channel.
bStation Info On / Off: Enable or disable
station information display.
bAF Off / On: Enable or disable Alternate
Frequency (AF).
bAlarm: Allows you to set radio alarm.
49
Applications
Internet Explorer
With Internet Explorer you can view web sites
and surf the Internet on your device just like
you do on a computer.
From the Today screen, select Start >
Internet Explorer.
In the address bar, enter the web address
you want to visit or choose from previously
entered addresses from Favorites or History.
Press the left or right soft key to display the
function bar.
You can do the following by selecting Menu.
bFavorites: You can view and select from
the list of your favorite web sites.
bAdd to Favorites: Select to add the
currently displayed web site to your
Favorites.
bGo to Web Address: Select to place
cursor on the address bar and enter
the web address that you want to visit
manually.
bHome Page: Select to visit the home
page.
bHistory: Select to view the history list of
recently visited web pages.
50
bForward: Select to go to the next page.
bRefresh: Select to refresh the current
web page.
bView: Select the view options.
• Text Size: Select the font size for the
page you are viewing.
• Enable ActiveX Controls: Select this
option to enable ActiveX Controls.
• Mobile: Select this option to view the
page in mobile format.
• Desktop: Select this option to view the
page in desktop format.
bTools: Select to change browser options
such as Speed Link, Properties and other
options.
bCopy/Paste: Allows you to use copy and
paste functions.
bExit: Select to exit the browser.
Applications
To zoom the page
bSelect Zoom then use the up and down
navigation keys to zoom in or out the
web page.
Note
bBrowsing the internet may incur
additional charges. Charges vary
depending on the type of connection
(i.e. GPRS, ActiveSync, or WiFi).
Please contact your network operator
for further information.
Windows Live™
With the pre-installed Windows Live™ on
your device, you can access Hotmail, search
the web and synchronize your Contacts.
To Set Up Windows Live™
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Windows Live.
2. Select Sign in to Windows Live.
3. Read the license agreement then select
Accept.
TIP!
bTo avoid typing your name and
password each time you log in, select
the Save Password box.
4. Enter your e-mail address and password
then select Next.
5. Select what you want to sync on your
device then select Next.
6. When finished, select Done.
Using Hotmail
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Windows Live.
2. Select Hotmail.
3. To synchronize e-mail, select Menu >
Send/Receive.
51
Applications
Windows Live™ Contacts
After setting up Windows Live™, you can
synchronize Contacts to your device.
To add Windows Live™ contacts
1. From the Today screen, select Contacts
> New.
2. Select Windows Live.
3. Enter the contact information, in the Email field, enter the e-mail address.
4. When finished, select Done.
Using Windows Live™ Search
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Windows Live.
2. Enter the word(s) to search on the search
bar, then press the Enter key.
3. Internet Browser opens and displays the
search results.
52
ActiveSync
ActiveSync synchronizes information on your
device with information on your PC, such
as Outlook content. ActiveSync can also
synchronize over a cellular network with
Microsoft Exchange Server, if your company
or service provider is running Microsoft
Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync.
When you synchronize, ActiveSync compares
the information on your device with the
information on your PC and/or Exchange
Server and updates all locations with the
most recent information.
With ActiveSync, you can:
bSynchronize information, such as Outlook
E-mail, Contacts, Calendar, or Tasks
information on your device with your PC,
as well as pictures, video, and music.
bSynchronize Outlook E-mail, Contacts,
Calendar appointments, and Tasks on your
device directly with Exchange Server so
that you can stay up to date even when
your PC is turned off.
bExchange files between your device and
your PC without synchronizing.
Applications
bSelect which types of information are
synchronized and specify how much
information is synchronized. For example,
you can choose how many weeks of past
Calendar appointments to synchronize.
Install ActiveSync on your PC. Once
ActiveSync is installed, you can synchronize
your device with the PC. You can download
ActiveSync from the Microsoft’s website
(http://www.microsoft.com) and install it on
your PC. Once you have installed ActiveSync
and set up a synchronization relationship,
ActiveSync on the PC recognizes your device
when you connect it, and automatically
transfers the synchronization settings you
specified on your device.
You may be able to synchronize your device
with Exchange Server through your company
or wireless service provider. If you plan to do
so, obtain e-mail address, Exchange Server
address, user name, password, and domain
name from your administrator before starting
the Sync Setup Wizard.
Setting up Windows Vista™
Instead of ActiveSync, Windows Vista™ uses
the Microsoft Windows Mobile™ Device
Center.
Note
bSome versions of Windows Vista
come with Windows Mobile Device
Center already installed. If Windows
Mobile Device center is not available
on your Windows Vista, you can
download it from Microsoft’s website
(http://www.microsoft.com) and
install it on your PC.
Set up synchronization in Windows
Mobile Device Center
When you connect your device to your PC
and start Windows Mobile Device Center
for the first time, you are asked to create
a Windows Mobile partnership with your
device. Follow the steps below to create a
partnership.
bConnect your device to your PC. Windows
Mobile Device Center configures itself and
then opens.
bOn the license agreement screen, click
Accept.
bOn the Windows Mobile Device Center’s
Home screen, click Set up your device.
53
Applications
Note
bChoose Connect without setting
up your device if you only want
to transfer media files, check for
updates, and explore your device but
not sync Outlook information.
bSelect the items you want to synchronize,
then click Next.
bEnter a device name and click Set
Up. When you finish the setup wizard,
Windows Mobile Device Center
synchronizes your device automatically.
Notice that Outlook e-mails and other
information will appear on your device
after synchronization.
Use Windows Mobile Device Center
To open Windows Mobile Device Center, click
Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile
Device Center on your Windows Vista
computer. On Windows Mobile Device Center,
you can do the following:
bClick Mobile Device Settings to change
synchronization settings.
54
bWhen you click Pictures, Music and
Video > ___ new pictures/video clips
are available for import, a wizard guides
you to tag and transfer photos from
your device to the Photo Gallery on your
Windows Vista PC.
bClick Pictures, Music and Video > Add
media to your device from Windows
Media Player to synchronize music and
video files using Windows Media™ Player.
bClick File Management > Browse
the contents of your device to view
documents and files from your device.
Setting up Windows XP
If you are using Windows XP, download
ActiveSync from Microsoft’s website
(http://www.microsoft.com) then follow the
steps below to install and set up ActiveSync
on your PC.
bFollow the on-screen instructions to install
ActiveSync.
bAfter installation is completed, connect
your device to your PC using the sync
cable.
- Connect the smaller end of the USB
cable to your LG GW550 device.
- Connect the larger end of the USB cable
to the USB port on your computer.
Applications
bThe Synchronization Setup Wizard
automatically starts and guides you to
create a synchronization relationship. Click
Next to proceed.
bTo synchronize your device with your
computer, clear the Synchronize directly
with a server running Microsoft Exchange
Server check box, and then click Next.
bSelect the information types that you want
to synchronize, and then click Next.
bClick Finish.
When you finish the wizard, ActiveSync
synchronizes your device automatically.
Synchronizing Information
When you connect your device to the PC
using a USB or a Bluetooth connection,
ActiveSync will immediately synchronize.
While the device is connected, ActiveSync
synchronizes every time you make a change
on either the PC or the device.
Synchronizing Outlook information
If you have set up a synchronization
relationship between your device and the PC,
synchronization keeps Outlook information
up-to-date on both computers.
ActiveSync synchronizes a limited amount
of information by default to save storage
space on your device. You can change the
amount of information synchronized for a
given information type in Settings for the
information type.
You can set up your device to synchronize
with more than one PC or with a combination
of one or more PCs and Exchange Server.
When synchronizing with multiple computers,
the items that you synchronize will appear
on all of the computers with which they are
synchronized.
For example, if you have set up
synchronization with two PCs (PC1 and
PC2), which have different items, and you
synchronize Contacts and Calendar on the
device with both computers, the result is
as follows:
55
Applications
Location
New state
PC1
All Outlook contacts and
calendar appointments that
were on PC2 are now also
on PC1.
PC2
All Outlook contacts and
calendar appointments that
were on PC1 are now also
on PC2.
Device
All Outlook contacts and
calendar appointments
from both PC1 and PC2
are on the device.
To start and stop synchronization
bTo synchronize Outlook information
and other local information on the PC,
including media files, connect your device
to the PC using Bluetooth or a cable.
bIf you are synchronizing directly with the
Exchange Server, you can use the PC
connection to the network that is “Desktop
Pass-through”, or you can synchronize
without connecting to the PC over a
cellular network.
bIn ActiveSync, select Sync. To end
synchronization before it completes,
select Stop.
56
bTo change which information is
synchronized
1. In ActiveSync on the device, select
Menu > Options.
2. Do one or both of the following:
bSelect the check box for any items
you want to synchronize. If you cannot
select a check box, you might have
to clear the check box for the same
information type elsewhere in the list.
bClear the check box for any items you
want to stop synchronizing.
3. To stop synchronizing with one PC
completely, select the PC and select
Delete.
Note
bOutlook e-mail can be synchronized
with only one computer. To change
available synchronization settings,
select the type of information and
select Settings.
Applications
To synchronize directly with Exchange
Server
You can set up synchronization with
Exchange Server on your device, if it is
available to you through your company or
wireless service provider. However, you
should first ask your administrator for the
following information and then carry on
with the steps: e-mail address, Exchange
Server address, user name, password, and
domain name.
1. In ActiveSync on the device, select Menu
> Configure Server. If you have not yet
set up synchronization with Exchange
Server, this will say Add Server Source.
2. Enter e-mail address, and select Next.
3. In the Server address, enter the address
of the running Exchange Server, check the
box if this Server requires an encrypted
(SSL) connection, and select Next.
4. Enter your user name, password, and
domain, then select Next. To change
the rules for resolving synchronization
conflicts, select Advanced.
5. Select the check boxes for the types of
items that you want to synchronize with
the Exchange Server.
6. To change available synchronization
settings, select the settings desired and
select Settings.
7. Select Finish.
Synchronizing via Bluetooth
You can connect your device to the PC to
synchronize using Bluetooth.
To synchronize with a PC via Bluetooth
1. First, check “Allow connections to one
of the following” of the ActiveSync
connection Settings menu on your PC.
Select the proper COM port.
If there is not an available connection,
then you should make a Bluetooth pairing.
2. Select the Menu > Connect via
Bluetooth.
57
Applications
58
Synchronizing Musics, Videos, and
Pictures
Change Media synchronization
settings
If you want to carry your music or other
digital media with you along while you travel,
ActiveSync works with Windows Media
Player to synchronize music, video, and
pictures.
Other than selecting the Media information
type in ActiveSync to be synchronized, all
media synchronization settings must be set
in Windows Media Player. Before media can
be synchronized, you must do the following:
bInstall Windows Media Player Version 10
on the PC.
bConnect your device to the PC with a
USB cable. If the device is currently
connected using Bluetooth, you must
end that connection before media can be
synchronized.
bInsert a storage card into your device
(32MB or larger is recommended).
bSet up a sync partnership between the
storage card and Windows Media Player.
Once you select the Media information type
in ActiveSync to be synchronized, any of
your favorite music, video, and picture files
in Windows Media Player playlists can be
synchronised. All you have to do is set up
synchronization in Windows Media Player for
those media files.
To set up a sync relationship with a storage
card:
1. Open Windows Media Player.
2. Click the Sync tab.
3. Select the storage card.
4. Click Set up Sync.
Applications
Internet Sharing
Bluetooth Manager
You can set up your PC to connect to the
Internet using the Internet connection on
your device.
Bluetooth enables compatible mobile
devices, peripherals and computers that are
in close proximity to communicate directly
with each other without wires. Your device
supports built-in Bluetooth connectivity,
which makes it possible to connect it with
compatible Bluetooth headsets, computer
applications and so on.
Note
bActiveSync software version 4.5 or
higher is required.
1. Connect the USB cable to the PC.
2. From the Today screen, select Start >
Internet Sharing.
3. Set PC Connection to USB or Bluetooth
PAN.
4. Set the Network Connection to a proper
APN.
5. Select Connect.
6. A data connection indicator ( /
/ ) is displayed when PDP activation is
performed successfully.
To Set the Bluetooth Configuration
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Bluetooth.
2. Select Yes to turn on Bluetooth. The
Bluetooth Manager Settings page is
displayed.
Note
bThe operating system of your PC
must be Windows XP, Service Pack
2 or higher.
59
Applications
To Make Your Device Discoverable
1. From the Settings page, highlight Not
Discoverable then press the Enter key.
2. Select visibility option (Always Visible,
Visible for 60 seconds, Not Visible).
3. Select Done.
Bluetooth Partnership
Note
bIf you use a PC Sync via Bluetooth,
you can exchange data within
Contacts.
bWhen you receive data from another
Bluetooth device, the device requests
a confirmation. After confirming the
transfer, the file will be copied to
your device.
bYou can set the shared folder in
Settings > Advanced... > File
Transfer.
60
A Bluetooth partnership is a relationship
that you create between your device
and another Bluetooth-enabled device in
order to exchange information in a secure
manner. Creating a partnership between two
devices involves entering the same personal
identification number (PIN) or Passkey
on both devices. Creating a partnership
between two devices is a one-time process.
Once a partnership is created, the devices
can recognize the partnership and exchange
information without entering a PIN again.
Make sure the two devices are within a
range of 10 meters from one another, and
Bluetooth is turned on and in discoverable
mode.
Applications
To create a Bluetooth Partnership
To Accept a Bluetooth Partnership
1. From the Settings page, select Add a
device.
2. To limit the search, select the type of
device you want to establish connection
with.
1. Ensure that the Bluetooth is turned on.
2. When prompted, enter a passkey (the
same passkey that is entered on the
device requesting the partnership) to
establish a secure connection.
3. Select OK.
Note
bMake sure the other device and its
Bluetooth function is turned on and
discoverable.
3. Select Continue. Your device searches for
the other device.
4. Highlight the device, then select Select.
5. Enter a passkey, then select OK.
Note
bThe passkey you enter must also be
the same passkey to be entered on
the other device.
bThe passkey must be 1 to 16
characters.
Services
After establishing connection with a
Bluetooth device, you can activate and set
the configuration of each Bluetooth profile.
Select Menu > Update. A list of services
is shown.
bSerial Port: Connect to a wireless serial
port on the device.
bSynchronization: Synchronize contacts
and other PIM items.
bBluetooth Networking: Share
information or connect to the Internet.
61
Applications
Settings Page
Accessories Page
From the Settings page, the following
options are available:
bAdd a Device: Select to set up a new
Bluetooth partnership.
bDisable Bluetooth: Turns Bluetooth off.
bLG-GW550: The default device name as
seen by other Bluetooth devices. Select this
option to change the name.
bNot Discoverable/Discoverable: Select
this option to set visibility status of your
device.
bAdvanced:
The following options are available:
bNetworking Manager: Allows you to
network with other Bluetooth devices
(Create a Private Network, Share Internet
Connection, Access Internet through
remote device).
bBusiness Card Exchange: Allows you
to send and receive business cards from
other devices.
bBT Send Object: Allows you to send
an object, such as an item or items in
Contacts, Outlook E-mail, Calendar, Audio,
Ring Tones, Images, and Videos.
• Connectivity: Select to set the devices
to allow connection.
• Serial Ports: Select to view Bluetooth
serial ports.
• File Transfer: Allows you to configure
file transfer settings.
• Audio: Allows you to configure handsfree related settings.
• Object Exchange: Allows you to
configure Object Push settings.
62
My Devices Page
This page lists all Bluetooth devices that you
have established partnership with.
bTo add more devices, select Menu >
Add Device.
bTo delete a selected device, select Menu
> Delete.
bTo update services, select Menu >
Update.
Applications
Office Mobile
Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile makes it easy for you to open
and edit Excel workbooks and templates
created on your PC.
To open an Excel file
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Office Mobile > Excel Mobile.
2. Locate the Excel file, then select Select.
To change view options, select View.
For other functions, select Menu.
bClose File: Select to close the file and
exit Excel Mobile.
bEdit: Select this option to edit the opened
file.
bFile: Allows you to save the file (Save As),
or send the file via e-mail.
bGo to: Allows you to go to a particular cell
or reference name.
bFind: Allows you to find matching word(s)
in the file.
bAbout: View software version.
Unsupported features in Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile does not fully support
some features such as formulas and cell
comments. Some data and formatting may
be lost when you save the workbook on
your device. Note the following Excel Mobile
formatting considerations:
bAlignment. Horizontal, vertical, and
wrap-text attributes remain the same, but
vertical text appears horizontal.
bBorders. Appear as a single line.
bCell patterns. Patterns applied to cells
are removed.
bFonts and font sizes. Fonts not supported
by your device are mapped to the closest
font available. The original font is listed
on your device. When the workbook is
opened in Excel on your PC again, the
data is displayed in the original font.
bNumber formats. Numbers formatted
using the Microsoft Excel 2007 Version
6.1 conditional formatting feature are
displayed in Number format.
63
Applications
bFormulas and functions. If an Excel file
contains a function that is not supported
by Excel Mobile, the function is removed,
and only the returned value of the
function appears. The following formulas
are also converted to values: formulas
entered as an array or containing an array
argument, for example, =SUM({1;2;3;4});
formulas containing external link
references or an intersection range
reference; and formulas containing
references past row 16384 are replaced
with #REF!
bProtection settings. Most worksheet and
workbook protection features are disabled
but not removed. However, support for
password protection has been removed.
Workbooks that are password-protected
or workbooks in which one or more
worksheets are password-protected
cannot be opened. You must remove the
password protection in Excel on the PC
and then synchronise to open the file on
the device.
bZoom settings. Are not retained. Excel
supports a per worksheet zoom setting,
while the Excel Mobile zoom setting is
applied to the entire workbook.
bWorksheet names. Names that reference
worksheets within the same workbook are
64
displayed accurately, but names that refer
to other workbooks, arrays, for example,
={1;2;3;4}, array formulas, or intersection
ranges are removed from the name list. If
a name is removed from the list, it is left
in formulas and functions, causing those
formulas to be resolved as “#NAME?”. All
hidden names are not hidden.
bAutoFilter settings. Are removed. However,
you can use the AutoFilter command in
Excel Mobile to perform similar functions.
If you have an AutoFilter applied to a
worksheet that causes rows to be hidden,
the rows remain hidden when the file is
opened in Excel Mobile. Use the Unhide
command to display the hidden rows.
bChart formatting. All charts will be
saved the way they are shown in Excel
Mobile. Unsupported chart types are
changed to one of these supported types:
Column, Bar, Line, Pie, Scatter, and
Area. Background colors, gridlines, data
labels, trend lines, shadows, 3D effects,
secondary axes, and logarithmic scales
are turned off.
bWorksheet features. The following
features are not supported in Excel Mobile
and are removed or modified when a
workbook is opened on the device: hidden
sheets are not hidden; VBA modules,
Applications
macro sheets, and dialog sheets are
removed and replaced with a place
holder sheet; text boxes, drawing objects,
pictures, lists, conditional formats, and
controls are removed; pivot table data is
converted to values.
OneNote Mobile
OneNote Mobile allows you to create notes
with added pictures and recordings.
To create a new note
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Office Mobile > OneNote Mobile.
2. Select New.
3. Compose your note.
4. When finished, select Done.
For other functions, select Menu.
bFormat: Select font style.
bList: Allows you to add or clear bullets
and numbers.
bTake Picture: Select this option to
capture an image and insert to note.
bInsert Picture: Allows you to add a
picture that is saved on your device.
bInsert Recording: Allows you to record
a voice note.
PowerPoint Mobile
With PowerPoint Mobile, you can open
and view slide show presentations created
on your PC in *.ppt and *.pps format with
PowerPoint ‘97 and later.
Many presentation elements built into the
slide shows such as slide transitions and
animations will play back on the device.
If the presentation is set up as a timed
slide show, one slide will advance to the
next automatically. Links to URLs are also
supported.
PowerPoint features not supported on the
device include:
bNotes. Notes written for slides will not
be visible.
bRearranging or editing slides. PowerPoint
Mobile is a viewer only.
bFile formats. Files created in *.ppt format
earlier than PowerPoint ‘97 and HTML
files in *.htm and *.mht formats are not
supported.
65
Applications
To start a slide show presentation
To zoom the slide show
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile.
2. Locate the the slide show you want to
view, then select Select.
If the presentation is set up as a timed slide
show, slides will advance automatically.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile.
2. Open the presentation.
3. Select Menu > Zoom In or Zoom Out.
To stop a slide show
• In a PowerPoint Mobile presentation,
select End.
To navigate between slides
You can advance to the next slide if a
presentation is not set up as a timed slide
show, return to the previous slide, or go to
any slide out of sequence.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile.
2. Open the desired presentation.
3. Select Menu > Next or Previous, or Go
to Slide then select the desired slide.
TIP!
bSimply press the left or right
navigation keys to advance to the
next slide or return to the previous
slide.
66
Word Mobile
Word Mobile is a streamlined version of
Microsoft Word. Word documents created on
your PC can be opened and edited on your
device and save them as *.doc, *.rtf, *.txt,
and *.dot files.
You can have only one document open at a
time. To open another document, you have to
close the first one.
When you close a document, the device
will automatically prompt you to save the
document. If you selected to save, you can
rename the document with your preferred
name and move it to another folder or a
storage card.
Word Mobile does not fully support some
features of Microsoft Word such as revision
marks and password protection. Some data
and formatting may be lost when you save
the document on your device.
The following features are not supported in
Word Mobile.
Applications
• Backgrounds
• Shapes and text boxes
• Artistic page borders
• Smart tags
• Metafiles
bBi-directional text. While Word
Mobile will open documents containing
bi-directional text, the indentations and
alignment may be displayed and saved
incorrectly.
bPassword-protected files. Word Mobile
does not support opening passwordprotected documents. You must first
remove the password protection in
Word on the PC if you want to view the
document on the device.
bDocument protection. Word Mobile does
not support displaying files that have been
protected in Word on the PC.
The following features are partially supported
in Word Mobile.
bPicture bullets
bRevision marks. When you open a
document that has revision marks in
Word Mobile, the document appears as if
all revision marks were accepted. When
you save the document in Word Mobile,
revision marks are lost.
bTable styles. When you save a document
in Word Mobile, some or all the formatting
that is defined in the table style is lost.
bUnderline styles. Underline styles not
supported by Word Mobile are mapped to
one of the four supported styles: regular,
dotted, wavy, or thick/bold/wide.
bLegacy Pocket Word files. You can open
*.psw files in Word Mobile; however, if you
edit a file, you will need to save it in *.doc,
*.rtf, *.txt, or *.dot format.
The following features are not supported on
the device; however, they are retained in the
file so that when a file is opened on the PC
again, they appear as expected.
bFootnotes, endnotes, headers, footers.
bPage breaks: Word Mobile does not
display breaks between pages. However,
all page breaks except for breaks at the
end of a document are retained in the
document.
bLists: When you open the document on
the computer again, indented lists are
displayed in the original form.
bFonts and font sizes. Fonts not supported
by the device are mapped to the closest
font available, although the original font
will be listed on the device.
67
Applications
Adobe Reader LE
Adobe Reader® LE is an application for
viewing PDF (Portable Document Format)
files on your device.
5. You can change the way programs are
viewed or ordered by selecting Menu >
View or Sort by.
6. To close Task Manager, select Menu
> Exit.
To open a PDF file
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Adobe Reader LE.
2. Browse for the PDF file you want to open,
then select Open.
3. To zoom the file, select Tools > Zoom.
4. To close the application, select Menu
> Exit.
Task Manager
68
In most cases, programs automatically close
to free up needed memory, however, you
can close programs manually using Task
Manager.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Accessories > Task Manager.
2. You can check the list of running
programs, memory and CPU information.
3. You can end the programs manually by
highlighting a program and selecting
End Task.
4. To close all running programs, select
Menu > End All Tasks.
MSN Money
Allows you have quick access to MSN
Money and view the latest stocks exchange
information on your device.
Note
bBefore accessing MSN Money, make
sure your device has a GPRS SIM
card installed.
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
MSN Weather
Allows you to connect to the Internet and
view the latest weather forecast from MSN
Weather.
Applications
Note
bBefore accessing MSN Weather,
make sure your device has a GPRS
SIM card installed.
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
Java
Your device supports Java and hence you
can easily download java games and other
java applications from the internet.
Note
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
GPS Accelerator
Allows you to download GPS data and to
enhance GPS peroformance.
Note
bBefore accessing GPS Accelerator,
make sure your device has a GPRS
SIM card installed.
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
AGPS Setting
Allow you to use AGPS to shorten the time a
GPS module used to determine its location.
Marketplace
Windows® Marketplace for mobile is a new
marketplace that will provide direct-to-phone
mobile applications and can be accessed
from both the phone and the Web.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Marketplace.
Note
bBefore accessing Marketplace, make
sure your device has a GPRS SIM
card installed.
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
69
Applications
Microsoft My Phone
Remote Desktop
Microsoft® My Phone synchronizes your
phone’s contacts, calendar, tasks, text
messages, music, photos, videos, and other
documents with your My Phone account at
http://myphone.microsoft.com.
Remote Desktop provides remote access
to the desktop of your computer running
Windows XP Professional, from your device.
Using Remote Desktop you can, for example,
connect to your office computer from home
and access all your applications, files, and
network resources as though you were in
front of your computer at the office.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Remote Desktop.
To Configure My Phone
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Microsoft My Phone.
2. Select Next.
3. Read the license, then select Accept.
4. Sign in your Windows Live ID, then select
Sign In.
5. Select synchronization method: Manual or
Automatic, then select Next.
6. Select Finish to start synchronization.
RSS Viewer
RSS Viewer is an application that allows you
to subscribe to RSS feeds and view them on
your device.
To Subscribe to RSS Feeds
Note
bBefore accessing Microsoft My
Phone, make sure your device has a
GPRS SIM card installed.
70
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
RSS Viewer.
2. Select Menu > Add Channel.
3. Enter the URL and Channel name and set
folder location, select Done.
Applications
To Update RSS Feeds
1. Highlight the folder or channel then press
the Enter key. A check mark appears on
the folder / channel box.
2. Select Menu > Update to start updating.
To View RSS Feeds
1. Highlight the channel then select View.
2. Highlight the news feed you want to view
from the list.
3. Press the Enter key to view the rest of
the story.
4. You can view the next or previous news
feed on the list by selecting Menu > Next
or Previous.
5. If you wish to view the news feed with
Internet Explorer, select Menu > Open
with IE.
6. To refresh page, select Menu > ReLoad.
7. To return to list view, select List View.
Note
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
Live Search Widget
Live Search Widget allows you to search the
Internet using Live Search. With just a click
of a button, you can launch Live Search in a
standalone window.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Search Widget.
Note
bBefore accessing Live Search Widget,
make sure your device has a GPRS
SIM card installed.
bAdditional costs may be incurred
when using this service.
File Explorer
The File Explorer application allows you to
open an explorer window similar to a desktop
Windows based system. The explorer window
allows you to navigate through your phone to
locate desired folders and files.
You can also quickly manage, delete, copy,
or edit any files and folders on your phone
and create new folders.
To access File Explorer, from the Today
screen, select Start > File Explorer.
71
Applications
bIf you want to see the files or folders in
the My device or Storage Card folder,
select either of the two.
bTo view the files or folders in the phone’s
memory, highlight the files or folders
that you want to view, then press the
Enter key.
bSelect the folder category (labelled My
Documents by default) and then the folder
that you want to view.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Voice Notes.
2. Highlight the recording from the list.
3. Select Menu > Rename to rename
the file.
4. Enter the new name, then select Done.
To delete recording
Voice Notes allows you to record your voice
notes.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Voice Notes.
2. Highlight the recording that you want to
delete from the list.
3. Select Menu > Delete.
To create a new voice note
Calendar
Voice Notes
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Voice Notes.
2. Select Record to start recording.
3. Select Stop to stop recording. The
recording is automatically saved with a
default file name.
4. To close voice notes, press
.
To listen to the voice note
72
To rename the file
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Voice Notes.
2. Select Menu > Play to playback
recording.
To Add an Event to your Calendar
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Calendar.
2. Select the desired date.
3. Select Menu > New Appointment.
4. Type in the subject and location of the
event and check the date and enter time
you would like your event to begin.
5. Check other information below.
6. When finished writing your note, select
Done.
Applications
To Change your Default Calendar View
To Change the Priority of a Task
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Calendar.
2. Select Menu > Day View / Week View /
Month View / Agenda View.
Before you can sort tasks by priority, you
need to specify a priority level for each task.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Tasks.
2. Select the desired task, then select Edit.
3. In the Priority box, select a priority level.
4. Select Done to return to the task list.
Tasks
Use Tasks to keep track of things you need
to do. A task can occur once or repeatedly
(recurring). You can set reminders for your
tasks and you can organize them using
categories.
Your tasks are displayed in a task list.
Overdue tasks are displayed in red.
To Create a Task
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Tasks.
2. Select Menu > New Task.
3. Enter a subject for the task, and fill in
information such as start and due dates,
priority, and so on.
4. When finished, select Done.
Note
bYou can easily create a short, to-dotype task. Simply enter the text on the
Enter new task here bar.
Note
bAll new tasks are assigned with
Normal priority by default.
To Set a Default reminder for all New
Tasks
You can have a reminder automatically
turned on for all new tasks you create.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Tasks.
2. Select Menu > Options.
3. Check the Set reminders for new
items box.
4. Select Done to return to the task list.
Note
bThe new tasks must have due dates
set in order for the reminder to take
effect.
73
Applications
To Show Start and Due Dates in the
Task List
Calculator
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Tasks.
2. Select Menu > Options.
3. Check the Show start and due dates
box.
4. Select Done to return to the task list.
The calculator function allows you to add,
subtract, multiply and divide. You can input
numbers using the number keys, and input
operators using button keys.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Accessories > Calculator.
To Locate a Task
StopWatch
When your list of tasks is long, you can sort
the list to quickly find a specific task.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Tasks.
2. In the task list, do one of the following:
bSort the list. Select Menu > Sort by,
then select the sort option.
bFilter the list by category. Select Menu
> Filter, then select the category you
want displayed.
Note
bTo filter your tasks further, select
Menu > Filter > Active Tasks or
Completed Tasks.
74
StopWatch allows you to start and stop time
for exact timing.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
StopWatch.
2. To start timing, select Start. The running
time is displayed as HH.MM.SS.hh
(hours, minutes, seconds, hundredths of
a second).
3. During the timing, you can record an
individual lap time by selecting Lap. The
lap times are listed on screen. Up to 99
lap times can be recorded.
4. To stop timer, select Stop.
5. You can either resume or reset the
stopwatch by selecting Resume or Reset.
Applications
Games
In the Games submenu, Windows games
like Bubble Breaker and Solitaire, have been
already been pre-installed on your device.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Games, then select the desired game.
XT9 Dictionaries
The XT9 Dictionaries allows you to add your
own words into the My Words XT9 dictionary.
It also allows you to configure automatic
substitution.
To add a word in XT9
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Dictionaries.
2. Select My Words XT9, then press the
Enter key.
3. Select Add.
4. Type the word to add in the dictionary,
then select Done.
5. To close My Words function, select Menu
> Exit.
To edit a word in XT9
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Dictionaries.
2. Select My Words XT9, then press the
Enter key.
3. Highlight the word you want to edit, then
select Menu > Edit.
4. Type the word to add in the dictionary,
then select Done.
To delete a word in XT9
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Dictionaries.
2. Select My Words XT9, then press the
Enter key.
3. Highlight the word you want to delete,
then select Menu > Delete.
4. To delete all the words in the My Words
list, select Menu > Delete All. Select Yes
to confirm.
75
Applications
To add auto-substitution shortcut
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Dictionaries.
2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press
the Enter key.
3. To add a shortcut, select Add.
4. Type the shortcut word and the word to
substitute, then select Done.
To edit auto-substitution shortcut
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Dictionaries.
2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press
the Enter key.
3. Highlight the word to edit, then select
Menu > Edit.
4. Type the shortcut word and the word to
substitute, then select Done.
To delete auto-substitution shortcut
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Dictionaries.
2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press
the Enter key.
3. Highlight the word to delete, select Menu
> Delete.
76
XT9 Settings
Use XT9 Settings to select the dictionary
language and other word prediction settings.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
XT9 Settings.
2. In the Language list, select the desired
language. Options are: English,
Portuguese, Spanish, French, Italian, and
German.
3. In the Word Completion Point list, select
how many typed letters do you want the
dictionary to start word completion.
4. To enable other options, check their
corresponding boxes.
5. When finished, select Done.
Smart Applicatin
Smart Application consists of a set of
applications offered by your phone.
You can put the application you want on
Smart Application.
Settings
To configure the settings on your device,
from the Today screen, select Start >
Settings, then select the settings category.
Call barring affects all voice and data calls,
except emergency calls.
Phone
Allows you to forward your incoming calls to
another phone number.
You can edit the general settings related to
making and receiving calls.
Call Options
Auto Answer
Set how quickly calls are automatically
answered during hands-free operation. This
setting does not apply when the ring type
is Silent.
Band Switch
You can change the settings related to
Network.
Call Barring
You can set restrictions for the following
calls:
bBlock incoming calls: All calls/When
roaming/Off.
bBlock outgoing calls: All calls/
International/International except to home
country/Off.
To edit mobile call barring settings, you need
a password. You obtain the barring password
from your service provider upon subscription
to this network service.
Call Forwarding
You can configure the following options:
bAny key answer: Check the box to
answer a call by pressing any key.
bShow SIM contacts: Check the box to
display your contacts saved in the SIM
card.
bVoice mail number: Call the voice mail
number to listen to your voice messages.
Voice mail number is automatically
configured upon receiving network service
from your service provider.
bText messages service center: Service
center number for all text messages. The
service center number is automatically
configured upon receiving network service
from your service provider.
bCountry code: Enter the country code in
your location.
bArea code: Enter the area code in your
location.
77
Settings
Call Waiting
To be notified of incoming calls while you
have a call in progress, check Provide call
waiting notifications, then select Done.
Caller ID
To display your phone number to the person
you are calling, select Everyone. Select No
one to hide it.
Channels
Allows you to receive cell broadcast
messages.
Fixed Dialing
Allows you to limit outgoing calls in certain
formats.
Networks
Displays the current network and allows you
to select the manner of selecting networks.
Current network
The current network displays in the Current
network field.
Network selection
Define how to choose between different
available networks when travelling, for
example.
bManual: You can select the network
yourself.
78
bAutomatic: To have the network selected
automatically.
Preferred network
To select other networks, from the Networks
page, select Menu > Preferred network
(retrieving settings may take a few minutes).
Select a network and re-order the priorities
for network usage by selecting Menu >
Move Up or Move Down.
Pre-Defined Text Messages
Your device has pre-defined text messages
that you can send a caller when you cannot
answer a call.
To edit pre-defined text message
1. Highlight the pre-defined text message,
then select Select.
2. Edit the message.
3. When finished, select Save.
Ringer Output
Allows you to select how your phone plays
the ringtone when using headset.
Sounds
bRing tone: You can select the ringtone for
incoming voice calls.
bReminders: You can select the alert tone
for reminder.
Settings
bNew e-mail: You can select the alert
tone that sounds when a new e-mail is
received.
bNew text message: You can select the
alert tone that sounds when a new text
message is received.
bNew voice message: You can select the
alert tone that sounds when a new voice
message is received.
bNew instant message: You can select
the alert tone that sounds when a new
instant message is received.
bNew channel message: You can select
the alert tone that sounds when a new
channel message is received.
bSIM toolkit messages: You can select
the alert tone that sounds when SIM
toolkit messages are received.
bExclamation: You can select the alert
tone that sounds when the device pops up
information.
bQuestion: You can select the alert tone
that sounds when the device prompts the
user with a question.
bWarnings: You can select the alert tone
that sounds when the device displays a
warning message.
bKeypad control: You can set the key tone
when keys are pressed.
Profiles
Your device comes with five pre-set profiles.
You can adjust and customise the ringing
tones, alert tones, and other device tones
for different events, environments, or caller
groups.
To edit the profile
1. Highlight the profile.
2. Select Menu > Edit.
3. Enter the name and select your desired
ringer and alert settings.
4. When finished, select Done.
To change the active profile
Highlight the profile and press the Enter key.
The checked profile name indicates the
current profile in use.
Home Screen
You can change how you want the Today
screen to look. The Today screen can show
your upcoming appointments, active tasks,
and information about calls and messages.
To Select Information Shown On
Screen
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Home Screen.
79
Settings
2. On Home screen layout, select your
desired layout option:
bSliding Panel: This is the default screen.
bSliding Panel Media: Select to display
media application shortcuts on the screen.
bWindows Simple
bWindows Default
bLarge Font
bWindows Basic
bWindows Live Default: Select to include
Windows Live search bar and other
Windows Live feature shortcuts on screen.
3. To display the recently opened programs
when Start is selected, check Show
Recent Programs.
4. When finished, select Done.
To select color for your screen
You can select color scheme for your screen.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Home Screen.
2. In the Color scheme box, use the
navigation keys to selet the a color to use.
3. When finished, select Done.
To Add Own Background Image
You can use one of your own pictures as the
background image on the Today screen.
80
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Home Screen.
2. In the Background image box, use the
navigation keys to select an image to use
as background.
3. When finished, select Done.
To Set Screen Timeout
To define how long the backlight remains on:
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Home Screen.
2. In the Time out box, use the navigation
keys to select a time out option.
3. When finished, select Done.
Note
User are able to set mp3 files in
storage card root directory or storage
card\my ringtones or my documents\my
ringtones as ringtone.
If users want to set background image
or any sound from storage card, only
image or sound files in storage card root
directory can be set.
WBMP images cannot be set as
homescreen, WBMP images can only be
viewed in the picture and video.
Settings
Clock & Alarm
Connections
Clock & Alarm can accessed by either of the
following:
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Clock & Alarm.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Clock & Alarm.
The Connections menu allows you to setup
various types of connections such as Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, Dial-Up, GPRS, and others.
Date and Time
You can view the time, day of the week
and date.
1. From the Clock & Alarm screen, highlight
Date and Time, then press the Enter key.
2. Select the Time zone. Set the date and
time.
3. To update the time, date, and time zone
information automatically, check Sync to
current time zone.
4. When finished, select Done.
Alarm
1. From the Clock & Alarm screen, highlight
Alarm 1 or 2, then press the Enter key.
2. Set the alarm time, frequency, sound, type,
and volume.
3. When finished, select Done.
Wireless Manager
Wireless Manager provides shortcuts
to access Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Phone
connection settings.
Note
bThe charge between using a data
plan to access the internet and using
Wi-Fi is different. Please contact
your network operator for further
information.
Wi-Fi
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Connections > Wireless
Manager.
2. To turn on, highlight the Wi-Fi bar, then
press the Enter key.
3. The device prompts you whether you
want to view available networks in range,
select Yes.
4. Select the network and select “Internet”
for the type of connection.
81
Settings
5. When finished, select Connect.
Note
bIf your Wi-Fi service provider or
network administrator sets WEP
encryption for network security, you
should fill in WEP key in the pop-up
window. If WEP encryption is not set,
this pop-up window is not shown.If
you don’t know the key, you need to
ask it to your Wi-Fi service provider or
network administrator.
6. Enter the required network key, then
select Done.
7. If Wi-Fi connection is established, you can
see the connection name (SSID) in the
Wireless Manager.
8. To turn off Wi-Fi, select Wi-Fi in the
Wireless Manager again.
Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Note
bBefore you set the WLAN
configuration, you need to ask your
WLAN service provider or your
network administrator for the IP
settings.
82
WARNING!
This device uses non-harmonised
frequency and is intended for use in all
European countries.
The WLAN can be operated in the EU
without restriction indoors, but cannot
be operated outdoors in France.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Connections > Wireless
Manager.
2. Select Menu > Wi-Fi Settings > Menu
> Advanced.
3. Enter the necessary network information
and connection preferences.
4. When finished, select Done.
To check WLAN status
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Connections > Wireless
Manager.
2. Select Menu > Wi-Fi Settings. The list
of available Wi-Fi connections and their
status are displayed.
bTo add a new Wi-Fi connection, select
Menu > Add.
bTo edit a Wi-Fi connection configuration,
select Menu > Edit.
Settings
Bluetooth
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Connections > Wireless
Manager.
2. To turn on/off, highlight the Bluetooth bar,
then press the Enter key.
3. To configure settings, select Menu >
Bluetooth Settings. The Bluetooth
Manager program launches, see
“Bluetooth Manager” on page 61.
Phone
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > Connections > Wireless
Manager.
2. To turn on/off, highlight the Phone bar,
then press the Enter key.
3. To configure phone settings, select Menu
> Phone Settings.
Security
Device Lock
You can keep your data more secure by
requiring a password every time the device
is turned on or when waking up from idle
mode.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Security > Device
Lock.
2. Check the Prompt if phone unused for
box, then select the idle time.
3. Set the password type and enter your
desired password.
4. Re-enter the password to confirm.
5. When finished, select Done.
Note
bWhen the device locks, you will be
prompted to enter the password to
unlock.
83
Settings
To Protect your Phone with a PIN
You can protect your phone from
unauthorized use by assigning a type of
password called a PIN (personal identification
number). Obtain the PIN from your wireless
service provider; you can change the PIN at
a later time.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Security > Enable
SIM PIN.
To Change your Password
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Security > Change
PIN2.
To Enter Owner Information
Saving your contact information on your
device allows for easy identification of the
device in case it is lost.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Owner Information.
Remove Programs
To free up space on your device’s memory,
remove unnecessary programs which are not
pre-installed on your device.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Remove Programs.
84
Power Management
Use Power Management to see current
battery status and configure battery usage to
save on power.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Power Management.
2. Set the backlight and display time out.
3. When finished, select Done.
Accessibility
Use Accessibility to select the system font
size and configure time out options and
volume.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > Accessibility.
2. Highlight an option:
bSystem font size: Select the system font
size from the list.
bMultipress time out: Select the time out
when multiple keys have been pressed
at one time.
bConfirmation time out: Select the
time out after a confirmation has been
executed.
bIn-call alert volume: Select the alert
volume level of incoming calls.
3. When finished, select Done.
Settings
Regional Settings
Setup E-mail
You can set the regional configuration and
style in which numbers, currency, dates and
time are displayed on your device.
1. From the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More >Regional Settings.
2. Highlight an option to change settings:
bLanguage: Set the language.
bLocale: Select the region where you are.
bShort date style: Select how you want
the numeric date format to appear on
screen.
bLong date style: Select how you want
the alphanumeric date format to appear
on screen.
bTime format: Select how you want the
time format to appear on screen.
bPositive and Negative number: Set
the decimal symbol, number of decimal
places, digit grouping symbol, and
negative number format.
bPositive and Negative currency: Set the
currency symbol, symbol position, decimal
symbol, number of decimal places, digit
grouping symbol, and negative number
format.
3. When finished, select Done.
You can setup an e-mail account by either of
the following.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More >More > Managed
Programs.
See ‘To Set Up an E-mail Account’ for
more details.
Managed Programs
Use Managed Programs to view a list of
programs that has been installed on your
device.
bFrom the Today screen, select Start >
Settings > More > More > Managed
Programs.
85
Accessories
Package Contents
Check to make sure the following items come with your device.
Power Adaptor
Data Cable
Earphones
ENGLISH
ǠŮǍŸ
GW550 User Guide
Standard Battery
www.lgmobile.com
P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0)
User Guide
Note
bAlways use genuine LG accessories.
bFailure to do so may invalidate your warranty.
bAccessories may vary in different regions: please check with your regional service
company or agent for further information.
86
GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment
GW550 / GW550h
EN 301 489-01 v1.6.1 / EN 301 489-07 v1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 v.1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 v1.2.1 /
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1
EN 300 328 V 1.7.1
EN 60950-1 : 2001
EN 50360:2001/EN62209-1:2006
EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1, EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1
The conformity to above standards is verified by the following Notified Body(BABT)
BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, United Kingdom
Notified Body Identification Number : 0168
I hereby declare under our sole responsibility
that the product mentioned above to which this
declaration relates complies with the above mentioned
standards and Directives
06. Oct. 2009
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Please read these simple guidelines.
Not following these guidelines may be
dangerous or illegal.
Exposure to radio frequency
energy
Radio wave exposure and Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR) information This
mobile phone model GW550 has been
designed to comply with applicable
safety requirements for exposure to
radio waves. These requirements
are based on scientific guidelines
that include safety margins designed
to assure the safety of all persons,
regardless of age and health.
• The radio wave exposure guidelines
employ a unit of measurement
known as the Specific Absorption
Rate, or SAR. Tests for SAR are
conducted using standardised
methods with the phone transmitting
at its highest certified power level in
all used frequency bands.
88
• While there may be differences
between the SAR levels of various LG
phone models, they are all designed
to meet the relevant guidelines for
exposure to radio waves.
• The SAR limit recommended by
the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP) is 2W/kg averaged over 10g
of tissue.
• The highest SAR value for this model
phone tested by DASY4 for use at
the ear is 0.846 W/kg (10g) and
when worn on the body is
1.34 W/Kg(10g).
• SAR data information for residents in
countries/regions that have adopted
the SAR limit recommended by the
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), which is 1.6 W/kg
averaged over 1g of tissue.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Product care and
maintenance
WARNING
Only use batteries, chargers
and accessories approved for
use with this particular phone
model. The use of any other types
may invalidate any approval or
warranty applying to the phone,
and may be dangerous.
• Do not disassemble this unit. Take
it to a qualified service technician
when repair work is required.
• Keep away from electrical appliances
such as TVs, radios, and personal
computers.
• The unit should be kept away from
heat sources such as radiators or
cookers.
• Do not drop.
• Do not subject this unit to
mechanical vibration or shock.
• Switch off the phone in any area
where you are required by special
regulations. For example, do not use
your phone in hospitals as it may
affect sensitive medical equipment.
• Do not handle the phone with wet
hands while it is being charged. It
may cause an electric shock and can
seriously damage your phone.
• Do not charge a handset near
flammable material as the handset
can become hot and create a fire
hazard.
• Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior
of the unit (do not use solvents such
as benzene, thinner or alcohol).
• Do not charge the phone when it is
on soft furnishings.
• The phone should be charged in a
well ventilated area.
• Do not subject this unit to excessive
smoke or dust.
89
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• Do not keep the phone next to
credit cards or transport tickets; it
can affect the information on the
magnetic strips.
• Do not tap the screen with a sharp
object as it may damage the phone.
• Do not expose the phone to liquid,
moisture or humidity
• Use the accessories like earphones
cautiously. Do not touch the antenna
unnecessarily.
• Do not use the phone or accessories
in places with high humidity such
as pools, greenhouses, solariums
or tropical environments, it may
cause damage to the phone and
invalidation of warranty.
90
Efficient phone operation
Electronics devices
All mobile phones may get
interference, which could affect
performance.
• Do not use your mobile phone
near medical equipment without
requesting permission. Avoid placing
the phone over pacemakers, for
example, in your breast pocket.
• Some hearing aids might be
disturbed by mobile phones.
• Minor interference may affect TVs,
radios, PCs, etc.
Road safety
Check the laws and regulations on the
use of mobile phones in the area when
you drive.
• Do not use a hand-held phone while
driving.
• Give full attention to driving.
• Use a hands-free kit, if available.
• Pull off the road and park before
making or answering a call if driving
conditions so require.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• RF energy may affect some
electronic systems in your vehicle
such as car stereos and safety
equipment.
• When your vehicle is equipped
with an air bag, do not obstruct
with installed or portable wireless
equipment. It can cause the air bag
to fail or cause serious injury due to
improper performance.
• If you are listening to music whilst
out and about, please ensure that
the volume is at a reasonable
level so that you are aware of your
surroundings. This is particularly
imperative when near roads.
Glass Parts
Some parts of your mobile device are
made of glass. This glass could break
if your mobile device is dropped on a
hard surface or receives a substantial
impact. If the glass breaks, do not
touch or attempt to remove. Stop using
your mobile device until the glass is
replaced by an authorized service
provider.
Blasting area
Do not use the phone where blasting is
in progress. Observe restrictions, and
follow any regulations or rules.
Avoid damage to your hearing
Damage to your hearing can occur
if you are exposed to loud sound for
long periods of time. We therefore
recommend that you do not turn on or
off the handset close to your ear. We
also recommend that music and call
volumes are set to a reasonable level.
91
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Potentially explosive
atmospheres
• Do not use the phone at a refueling
point.
• Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not transport or store flammable
gas, liquid, or explosives in the same
compartment of your vehicle as your
mobile phone and accessories.
In aircraft
Wireless devices can cause
interference in aircraft.
• Turn your mobile phone off before
boarding any aircraft.
• Do not use it on the ground without
permission from the crew.
Children
Keep the phone in a safe place out of
the reach of small children. It includes
small parts which may cause a choking
hazard if detached.
92
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not be available
under all mobile networks. Therefore,
you should never depend solely on the
phone for emergency calls. Check with
your local service provider.
Battery information and care
• You do not need to completely
discharge the battery before
recharging. Unlike other battery
systems, there is no memory effect
that could compromise the battery’s
performance.
• Use only LG batteries and chargers.
LG chargers are designed to
maximize the battery life.
• Do not disassemble or short-circuit
the battery pack.
• Keep the metal contacts of the
battery pack clean.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• Replace the battery when it
no longer provides acceptable
performance. The battery pack
maybe recharged hundreds of times
until it needs replacing.
• Recharge the battery if it has
not been used for a long time to
maximize usability.
• Do not expose the battery charger
to direct sunlight or use it in high
humidity, such as in the bathroom.
• Do not leave the battery in hot or
cold places, this may deteriorate the
battery performance.
• There is risk of explosion if the
battery is replaced by an incorrect
type.
• Dispose of used batteries according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Please recycle when possible. Do not
dispose as household waste.
• If you need to replace the battery,
take it to the nearest authorized LG
Electronics service point or dealer for
assistance.
• Always unplug the charger from the
wall socket after the phone is fully
charged to save unnecessary power
consumption of the charger.
• Actual battery life will depend on
network configuration, product
settings, usage patterns, battery and
environmental conditions.
93
Trouble shooting
This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone.
Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you
to correct yourself.
Message
Possible causes
Possible Solutions
SIM error
There is no SIM card in
the phone or it is inserted
incorrectly.
Make sure the SIM card is correctly
inserted.
No network
connection
Signal weak
Outside GSM network area
Move towards a window or into an
open area. Check the service provider
coverage map.
Codes do not
match
To change a security code,
you will need to confirm
the new code by entering it
again. The two codes you
have entered do not match.
Contact your Service Provider.
Function cannot
be set
Not supported by Service
Provider, or registration
required
Contact your Service Provider.
Calls not
available
Dialling error
New SIM card inserted
Charge limit reached
New network not authorised. Check
for new restrictions. Contact Service
Provider or reset limit with PIN 2.
On/Off key not pressed long
enough
Battery flat
Press the On/Off key down for at least
two seconds.
Charge battery. Check the charging
indicator on the display.
Clean the contacts.
Phone cannot
be switched on
Battery contacts dirty
94
Message
Possible causes
Possible Solutions
Battery totally empty
Temperature out of range
Charge battery.
Make sure the ambient temperature
is right, wait for a while, and then
charge again.
Check the power supply and
connection to the phone. Check the
battery contacts and clean them if
necessary.
Plug in to a different socket or check
the voltage.
If the charger does not warm up,
replace it.
Only use original LG accessories.
Replace battery.
Contact problem
Charging error
No mains voltage
Charger defective
Wrong charger
Battery defective
Phone loses
network
Signal too weak
Reconnection to another service
provider is automatic.
Number not
permitted
The Fixed dial number
function is on.
Check settings.
95
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪GSM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.PIN 2‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫•ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠّﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ّﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ّ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫• ّ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ RF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎً ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ّ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫•ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎً ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫•ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻻ ّ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪ .(SAR‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪GW550‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .SAR‬ﻭﺗﺠﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ ،LG‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ 86‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺴﻢ‬
‫)‪ (ICNIRP‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ّ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪DASY4‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ‪ 0.846‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ )‪10‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺪ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪1.34‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ )‪ 10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺘﺒﻨﻰ ﺣﺪ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪ (IEEE‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 1.6‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ ﻛﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ (1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment
GW550 / GW550h
EN 301 489-01 v1.6.1 / EN 301 489-07 v1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 v.1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 v1.2.1 /
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1
EN 300 328 V 1.7.1
EN 60950-1 : 2001
EN 50360:2001/EN62209-1:2006
EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1, EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1
The conformity to above standards is verified by the following Notified Body(BABT)
BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, United Kingdom
Notified Body Identification Number : 0168
I hereby declare under our sole responsibility
that the product mentioned above to which this
declaration relates complies with the above mentioned
standards and Directives
06. Oct. 2009
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ (‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ǠŮǍŸ‬‬
‫‪ENGLISH‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪GW550‬‬
‫‪www.lgmobile.com‬‬
‫)‪P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.SIM PIN‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪.SIM PIN‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ّ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫< ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻴّﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫< ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫< ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.61‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫< ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ WEP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪Wi-‬‬
‫‪ Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺴﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪ (SSID‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫< ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.IP‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍً ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﻖ ﻭﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫< ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻭ‬
‫‪ GPRS‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫< ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows Simplea‬‬
‫‪Windows Defaulta‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪Windows Basica‬‬
‫‪ :Windows Live Defaulta‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪ Windows Live search‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Windows Live‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪء‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪a‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺸﻐﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮّﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮّﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻋ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪XT9‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ‪ ،XT9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ XT9‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ XT9‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ XT9‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪XT9‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ XT9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪XT9‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪ XT9‬ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ‪ .XT9‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) HH.MM.SS.hh‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 99‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪XT9‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Bubble Breaker‬ﻭ‪Solitaire‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ‪ ،XT9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪XT9‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪< XT9‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪.XT9‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ‪ ،XT9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ّ ،‬ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻓﺮﺯ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺣﻴّﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ّ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ )ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻲ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺗﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳُﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪RSS‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪RSS‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ ،Internet Explorer‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.IE‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Live Search Widget‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ Live Search Widget‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .Live Search‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Live Search‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪.Search Widget‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،Live Search Widget‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ GPRS SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬
‫‪ .Windows‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Microsoft My Phone‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ Microsoft® My Phone‬ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ My Phone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://myphone.‬‬
‫‪.microsoft.com‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪ Professional‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪My Phone‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Microsoft My‬‬
‫‪.Phone‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Windows Live ID‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ّ .4‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،Microsoft My Phone‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ GPRS SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪RSS‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪ RSS‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪ RSS‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪RSS‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪.RSS‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ URL‬ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪Java‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،MSN Weather‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ GPRS SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ‪ Java‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Java‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Java‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪GPSExtra‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ‪.GPS‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،GPSExtra‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ GPRS SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪AGPS‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Marketplace‬‬
‫‪Windows® Marketplace for mobile‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪.Marketplace‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Marketplace‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ GPRS SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AGPS‬ﻟﺘﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GPS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Adobe Reader LE‬‬
‫‪ Adobe Reader® LE‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪PDF (Portable Document‬‬
‫)‪ Format‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪PDF‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Adobe Reader‬‬
‫‪.LE‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ < ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪.(CPU‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪MSN Money‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪MSN Money‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،MSN Money‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ GPRS SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪MSN Weather‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻣﻦ ‪.MSN Weather‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ‪Word Mobile‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪Word‬‬
‫‪ Mobile‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪Word‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Word Mobile‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ Word‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪.Word Mobile‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍً ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Word Mobile‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻛﺄﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Word Mobile‬ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍً ﻓﻲ ‪Word‬‬
‫‪ ،Mobile‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻄﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻄﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ Word Mobile‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﻂ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﻮﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪/‬ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‪/‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .Legacy Pocket Word‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ *‪ psw.‬ﻓﻲ ‪Word Mobile‬؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫*‪ doc.‬ﺃﻭ *‪ rtf.‬ﺃﻭ *‪ txt.‬ﺃﻭ *‪.dot.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺅﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺬﻳﻴﻼﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ‪Word Mobile‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫< ‪.PowerPoint Mobile‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫< ‪.PowerPoint Mobile‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ PowerPoint Mobile‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫< ‪.PowerPoint Mobile‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫‪Word Mobile‬‬
‫‪ Word Mobile‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ .Microsoft Word‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪Word‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪ *.doc‬ﻭ‪ *.rtf‬ﻭ‪*.txt‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.*.dot‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Word Mobile‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.Word Mobile‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪OneNote Mobile‬‬
‫‪PowerPoint Mobile‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ OneNote Mobile‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،PowerPoint Mobile‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ *.ppt‬ﻭ‪ *.pps‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ PowerPoint ‘97‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ URL‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ PowerPoint‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪PowerPoint .‬‬
‫‪ Mobile‬ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ *.ppt‬ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ PowerPoint ‘97‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ HTML‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ *.htm‬ﻭ‪ *.mht‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫< ‪.OneNote Mobile‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪Excel‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ‪ ،Excel Mobile‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺻﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪SUM({1= ،‬؛‪2‬؛‪3‬؛‪({4‬؛ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 16384‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑـ ‪!REF#‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ‪Excel‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Excel‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Excel Mobile‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪1}= ،‬؛‪2‬؛‪3‬؛‪ ،{4‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 62‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻛـ ”?‪ .“#NAME‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪Excel Mobile‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ .Excel Mobile‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪.Excel Mobile‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ,‬ﺧﻂ‪ ,‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ,‬ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ‪,‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ Excel Mobile‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،VBA‬ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﺎﺋﺒﺔ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪pivot‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫‪Excel Mobile‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻬّﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ‪ Excel Mobile‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ Excel‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪Excel‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫< ‪.Excel Mobile‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،Excel‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫‪.Excel Mobile‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺑﺤﺚ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪Excel Mobile‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Excel Mobile‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪:Excel Mobile‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺨﻂ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﻓﻲ ‪ Excel‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Excel 2007‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪6.1‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :LG-Timesa‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ :BT‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪ Outlook‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ( ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ PIM‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ )ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ‪60‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ < ...‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫)‪ (PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ PIN‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪Windows XP, Service‬‬
‫‪ Pack 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.5‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ActiveSync‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ِ .1‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑـ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪.PAN‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ APN‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ‪( / /‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻤﻞ ‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ ActiveSync‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Media‬‬
‫‪ .Player‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ‬
‫‪.Windows Media Player‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .Windows Media Player‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Media Player‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ‪.Windows Media Player‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Sync‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.Sync‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Media Player‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Media Player‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪Exchange‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Exchange‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Exchange‬ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،Exchange‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ Exchange‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ّ (SSL‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺿﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.Exchange‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ COM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ 1‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ 1‬ﻭﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Outlook‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،Exchange Server‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ”‪Desktop‬‬
‫‪) “Pass-through‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،ActiveSync‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ‪Synchronization Setup Wizard‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻳﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪ ،Exchange Server‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Outlook‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ .Exchange‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ 1‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،(2‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Outlook‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪Windows Mobile Device‬‬
‫‪ Center‬ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ Outlook‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows Mobile Device‬‬
‫‪Center‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪،Windows Mobile Device Center‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ < ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ < ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Mobile Device Center‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ .Windows Vista‬ﻓﻲ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ ،Mobile Device Center‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ <‬
‫___ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﺩﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻦ ‪Windows Media‬‬
‫‪ Player‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Windows Media™ Player‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Media® Player Mobile‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.112‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ < ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ ActiveSync‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫)‪ (http://www.microsoft.com‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫‪.ActiveSync‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪LG‬‬
‫ ِ‬‫‪.GW550‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪b‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒّﺖ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ ،ActiveSync‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ )‪(http://www.microsoft.com‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪Exchange‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Exchange‬ﻭﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪.Sync Setup Wizard‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،ActiveSync‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ™‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Vista‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ™‪Microsoft Windows‬‬
‫‪.Device Center Mobile‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪Windows Mobile Device‬‬
‫‪ Center‬ﻣﺜﺒًّﺘﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .Windows Vista‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫‪Windows Mobile Device center‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ ،Vista‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ )‪(http://www.microsoft.com‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Mobile‬‬
‫‪) Device Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪) Mobile Device Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ (Windows‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪Windows Mobile‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Mobile Device Center‬ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Windows Mobile Device‬‬
‫‪ Center‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™‪Windows Live‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™‪ ،Windows Live‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™‪Windows Live‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Windows Live‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows Live™ Search‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪.Live‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ .Outlook‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ،Microsoft Exchange‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪ Exchange‬ﻣﻊ ‪.Exchange ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Exchange‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،ActiveSync‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ Outlook‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ Outlook‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Exchange‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻠﻚ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ GPRS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ActiveSync‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .(WiFi‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫™‪Windows Live‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ™‪ Windows Live‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Hotmail‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™‪Windows Live‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪.Live‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Windows Live‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨّﺐ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Hotmail‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪.Live‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Hotmail‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Internet Explorer‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Internet Explorer‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Internet‬‬
‫‪.Explorer‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ :ActiveX‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.ActiveX‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻧﺴﺦ‪/‬ﻟﺼﻖ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺗﻔﺤﺼﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪ّ ،‬ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ّ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ ،FM‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :AF‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ :URL‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ a‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪.Windows‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺰﺝ‪ /‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ ،Media Player‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪Windows Media‬‬
‫‪ ،Player‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺰﺝ‪ /‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows Media‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪Microsoft Windows Media Player‬‬
‫‪ 10 Mobile‬ﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ WAV :‬ﻭ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪ WMV‬ﻭ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ SP-MIDI‬ﻭ‪ SMAF‬ﻭ‪ AAC‬ﻭ‪ AMR‬ﻭ‪ 3GP‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ MP4‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪Windows Media‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Windows Media‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ Media‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪MMS‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪ Outlook‬ﺃﻭ ‪(MMS‬‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ < ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻏﺒﺎﺷﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ < ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫< ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼ ّﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ّﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‪ :‬ﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻤّﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺐ ّ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺼ ّﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :PMKa‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ ‪ /‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ ‪ /‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ّ :‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،MMS‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ < ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪.Media Player‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )‪ٍ 5‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ٍ 10‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪3) .‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪ 5 ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ 50) .‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 60‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪a‬ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً(‬
‫‪a‬ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ MMS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ Outlook‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ Exchange Server‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.ActiveSync‬‬
‫• ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫ﻳﺪﻳﺮ ‪Windows Mobile 6.5 Standard‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ّﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،VPN‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺭﺩ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ <‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﺺ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ®Microsoft Outlook‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.®Exchange Server‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪ Hotmail‬ﻭ‪ Yahoo!Mail‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺭﺩ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫< ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪(ISP‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.VPN‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪b‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ) MMS‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ (‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ) SMS‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ (‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ < ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ < ‪.MMS‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﺑﻼ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.3G‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.3G‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨّﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻦ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺕُﻋﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ 3G‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ 1‬ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﻌﻴًّﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫< ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ؛ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺪءﺍً ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”‪ “0‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﺎً ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ّ ،‬ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ <‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻇﻔﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪:SIM‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻚ ﻭﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ‬
‫‪ Outlook‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Outlook‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ Outlook‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Outlook‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪XT9‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ XT9‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻹﻣﻼء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،XT9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ + Fn‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ XT9‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪XT9‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ )ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ‪OneNote < Office Mobile‬‬
‫‪.Mobile‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Fn‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Fn‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Fn‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪QWERTY‬‬
‫‪Sym‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪DEL‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪QWERTY‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ QWERTY‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪CAPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫‪CAPS‬‬
‫‪CAPS‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows Live‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ™‪.Windows Live‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪MSN Money‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ MSN Money‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪MSN‬‬
‫‪Weather‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.MSN Weather‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Widget‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Live Search‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪XT9‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪Marketplace‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft My‬‬
‫‪Phone‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪My Phone‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.http://myphone.microsoft.com‬‬
‫‪Adobe‬‬
‫‪Reader LE‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ *.pdf‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪AGPS‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪GPSExtra‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫‪Java‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Java‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Media‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Windows Media Player‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪RSS‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ RSS‬ﺃﻭ ‪.RDF‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫‪Explorer‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ Bubble Breaker :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Solitaire‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺪء ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪء‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪Office Mobile‬‬
‫‪Excel Mobile‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Excel‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Word Mobile‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Word‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪PowerPoint‬‬
‫‪Mobile‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪OneNote‬‬
‫‪Mobile‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍً ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ < ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ < ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ HSDPA‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﺸﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫)‪ WCDMA (3G‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ HSDPA‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫‪) GPRS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ 3G‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬
‫‪a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻬﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ *‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ < ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫‪.1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫‪ّ .4‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ!‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EN‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣُﺼﻤﱠﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪.microSD‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪OP‬‬
‫‪CK‬‬
‫‪LO‬‬
‫‪EN‬‬
‫‪OP‬‬
‫‪CK‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪LO‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ!‬
‫‪a‬ﻻ ﺗُﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (A‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(B‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫‪ّ .2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ّ‬
‫)‪.(C‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )‪ (D‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫)‪ (E‬ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﺼﻌﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﻷﻇﺎﻓﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ّ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )‪.(A‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )‪.(B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪...‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﺭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪...‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ( ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ِ .2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ( ‪USB‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ِ .4‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺬﺭﺍً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ )‪.(B‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ .2‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺿﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪GW550‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪a‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪GW550‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪a‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫‪ .12‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .15‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .16‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .17‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .18‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .21‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .22‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .23‬ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .24‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪GW550‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .15‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫‪ .17‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .18‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .20‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .21‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .22‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪OPEN‬‬
‫‪ .24‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫‪LOCK‬‬
‫‪ .23‬ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪micro‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫‪ .11‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪microSD‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ GW550 Windows Mobile‬ﻣﻦ ‪.LG‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪76 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ‪76 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪76 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ‪76 ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ّ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ‪76 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪77 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪77 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪78 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪78 ...........‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪78 ...................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪78 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪78 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪79 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪79 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪79 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪79 ..........................‬‬
‫‪79 ...............................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪81 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪81 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪81 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪81 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪82 .......................PIN‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪82 .................................‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‪82 .............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪82 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪82 .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪82 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪83 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪83 .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ ‪83 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪84...................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ‪84 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪86..........‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪91...........‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪58 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪59 ................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪59 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪60 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪60 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ‪60 ......................................‬‬
‫‪61 ..................................... Office Mobile‬‬
‫‪61 ......................................Excel Mobile‬‬
‫‪63 ................................ OneNote Mobile‬‬
‫‪63 ............................ PowerPoint Mobile‬‬
‫‪64 ......................................Word Mobile‬‬
‫‪66 ..............................Adobe Reader LE‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪66 .................................... PDF‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪66 .............................................‬‬
‫‪66 ......................................MSN Money‬‬
‫‪66 ...................................MSN Weather‬‬
‫‪67 ..........................................GPSExtra‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪67 ......................................... AGPS‬‬
‫‪67 .................................................. Java‬‬
‫‪67 ..................................... Marketplace‬‬
‫‪68 ........................Microsoft My Phone‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪68 .............................. My Phone‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪68 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪68 ..........................................RSS‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪68 .............RSS‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪69 ...................RSS‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪69 ................... RSS‬‬
‫‪69 .........................Live Search Widget‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪69 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪70 ....................................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪71 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪71 ............................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪71 ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪71 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ‪71 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ‪71 ................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪72 .......‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪72‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪72 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪72 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪73 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪73 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ ‪73 ......................................... XT9‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪73 ............................. XT9‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪73 .............................. XT9‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪74 ...............................XT9‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪74 ....................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪74 .....................‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪74 .....................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪74 .......................................... XT9‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪75..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪75 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪75 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ‪75 ......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪75 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪75 .............................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪75 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪76 ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪76 ......................................‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪30 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪31 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ‪31 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪31 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪32....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪32 .................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪32 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪32 .........................................‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ) SMS‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ( ‪32 ............‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ) MMS‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ( ‪32 ..........‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪33 ...........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪33 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪33 .......................‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪34 .....‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪34 .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪35 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪35 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪36..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪36 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪36 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪36 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪37 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪38 .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪39 .................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ‪39 ...........‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪39 ......................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪40 ............................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪40 ..................‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ‪40 .......................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪40 ........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪41 ..................‬‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪42 .............................. MMS‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪42 ...........................‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪42 ............................‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪43 ........................‬‬
‫‪43 ............................... Windows Media‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪44 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪45 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ‪45 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪46 ..............................................FM‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪47 ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪48..................................‬‬
‫‪48 ............................. Internet Explorer‬‬
‫™‪49 ............................. Windows Live‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™‪49 ..................... Windows Live‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪49 ................................. Hotmail‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™‪50 ....................Windows Live‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪50 ....... Windows Live™ Search‬‬
‫‪50 .......................................ActiveSync‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™‪51 .....................Windows Vista‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪52 ......................Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪53 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪55 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪57 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪57 ............................................‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪57 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ‪58 .........................‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪6........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪7.........................GW550‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪10......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪10 ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪10 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪11 ......................................... SIM‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪12 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪13 .............. microSD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪15 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪15 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪15 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪15 ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪16..........................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪16 .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪17 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ‪18 ......................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪19 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪23..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪23 ................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪23 .........................QWERTY‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪24 ............................................ XT9‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪24 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪24 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪25....................................‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪25 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪25 .............................Outlook‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪25 ........................... SIM‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪25 .....................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪25 ................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪26 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪26 ...........................‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪26 .....................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪26 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪27....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪27 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪27 ...........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪27 ..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪27 ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪27 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪28 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ‪28 ........................‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪28 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪28 .................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪28 ..........................‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪28 ..............................‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ‪29 .....................‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪29 ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪29 ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪29 ..................................‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪30 ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ‪30 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪30 ............................‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪30 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ‪30 .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪30 ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪30 .....................................‬‬
‫‪GW550‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪.LG GW550 Windows Mobile‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.LG Electronics‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.LG Electronics‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising